Page 1 Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use. In particular, be sure to read "1.1.1 For Your Safety (Page 14)" before using this product. KX-NS1000: PCMPR Software File Version 002.10000 or later...
Page 2 Introduction About this Programming Manual The PC Programming Manual is designed to serve as a system programming reference for the Panasonic Pure IP-PBX. It explains how to programme this PBX using Web Maintenance Console. The PC Programming Manual is divided into the following sections: Section 1, Overview Provides an overview of programming the PBX.
Page 3 • Some optional hardware, software, and features are not available in some countries/areas, or for some PBX models. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information. • Product specifications, including text displayed by the software, are subject to change without notice.
Page 4 KX-NS1000UK and the KX-NS1000NE are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Radio & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) Directive 1999/5/EC. Declarations of Conformity for the relevant Panasonic products described in this manual are available for download by visiting: http://www.doc.panasonic.de...
Page 5: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 Overview ....................13 Introduction ........................14 1.1.1 For Your Safety ......................14 1.1.2 Introduction ........................16 1.1.3 Entering Characters .......................17 PC Programming ......................21 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console ................21 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode ................25 1.2.2.1 Editing and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode ..........30 1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types ....................31...
Page 6 Table of Contents Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear ..................93 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group ..................94 Tool—Extension List View .....................95 Tool—Import ........................96 Tool—Export ........................101 Tool—Screen Customise ....................102 Tool—UM Data Backup ....................103 6.9.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup ..............104 6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup ..............105 6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore ....................106 6.11...
Page 7 Table of Contents 7.10 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording ..............151 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting ........151 7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting .........152 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List ........153 7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance ..........156 7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance ................157 7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection ..................158 8 Users .....................159 Users—User Profiles ....................160 8.1.1...
Page 8 Table of Contents 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port ....374 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2 ..386 9.29.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2—Card Property - OPB3 ......................388 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property .........................390 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station ........392 9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option .............395 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-4] Configuration—Clock Priority .........397 9.34...
Page 9 Table of Contents 11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group ............540 11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group ..........541 11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting ......542 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group ............543 11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—All Setting ........545 11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—External Pager ......546 11.5 PBX Configuration—[3-5] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group .....547 11.5.1...
Page 10 Table of Contents 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button ....665 12.2.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy ......................674 12.2.4 PBX Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send ..........................675 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console ..........676 13 PBX Configuration—[5] Optional Device ...........677 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone ..........678 13.2...
Page 11 Table of Contents 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate ........................758 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table ........760 18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous ......765 19 PBX Configuration—[11] Maintenance ..........767 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main ............768 19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation ......782 19.3...
Page 12 27.4 Network Service—[4] Other ..................950 27.4.1 Network Service—[4-1] Other—Security ..............950 28 Appendix ....................951 28.1 Revision History ......................952 28.1.1 KX-NS1000 PCMPR Software File Version 002.0xxxx ..........952 28.1.2 KX-NS1000 PCMPR Software File Version 002.1xxxx ..........954 Feature Programming References ............955 PC Programming Manual...
Page 13: Overview
Section 1 Overview This section provides an overview of programming the PBX. PC Programming Manual...
Page 14: Introduction
1.1.1 For Your Safety 1.1 Introduction 1.1.1 For Your Safety To prevent personal injury and/or damage to property, be sure to observe the following safety precautions. The following symbols classify and describe the level of hazard and injury caused when this unit is operated or handled improperly.
Page 15 Unplug the PBX from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise. These conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre. CAUTION •...
Page 16: Introduction
1.1.2 Introduction 1.1.2 Introduction These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the PBX. Each feature in the PBX has default settings that can be changed to customise the PBX to your requirements. These settings control the functions of the PBX, and changing them is referred to as "system programming".
Page 17: Entering Characters
1.1.3 Entering Characters 1.1.3 Entering Characters The characters on a white background below can be used when storing a name, message, password or other text entry data using a PC. The available characters vary according to the model of PBX. Table 1 (Standard) PC Programming Manual...
Page 18 1.1.3 Entering Characters Table 2 (For CE model) PC Programming Manual...
Page 19 1.1.3 Entering Characters Table 3 (For RU model) PC Programming Manual...
Page 20 1.1.3 Entering Characters Table 4 (For GR model) PC Programming Manual...
Page 21: Pc Programming
1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console 1.2 PC Programming 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console System programming, diagnosis and administration can be performed with a PC using Web Maintenance Console. Web Maintenance Console is accessed through a Web browser running on a networked PC. This section describes how to set up and access Web Maintenance Console.
Page 22 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console Recommended Specification 2048 MB Hard Disk 10 GB available space Copyright for MD5 This software uses the Source Code of RSA Data Security, Inc. described in the RFC1321 (MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm). Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved. Licence to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the "RSA Data Security, Inc.
Page 23 – http://kx-ns1000. Note If entering "http://kx-ns1000.", be sure to include the period at the end as shown. LAN or VPN connection: Launch your Web browser and input the IP address of the PBX followed by the Web Maintenance Console port number into the address bar. The input method will differ according to the PC’s connection to the PBX.
Page 24 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console After you successfully log in to Web Maintenance Console, the Home screen will be displayed and programming can be performed. For details about accessing the different features of Web Maintenance Console, See 2.1.5 Software Interface. Connecting to Web Maintenance Console (Off-line Mode) To connect to Web Maintenance Console in Off-line mode, use the New -Offline Mode or Open -Offline Mode operations in the Off-line Web Maintenance Console programme launcher.
Page 25: Pc Programming Using Off-Line Mode
The following procedures outline how to install and use the Off-line Web Maintenance Console for Off-line mode programming. Installation Note • Be sure to install and use the latest version of "KX-NS1000 Off-line WEB-Maintenance Console". • Before beginning the installation of Off-line Web Maintenance Console, the following software must be installed on the PC: –...
Page 26 Easy Setup Wizard. For details, see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard. To convert a KX-TDE/KX-NCP’s system data file to KX-NS1000 KX-TDE/KX-NCP system data can be converted for use with the KX-NS1000 by using the Database Converter. In the Programme Launcher, click Database Converter. The Database Converter screen will be displayed in your PC.
Page 27 PBX. When you use the following procedure to open a system file created using a previous version of the KX-NS1000 software, a confirmation screen will be displayed asking whether you want to convert the system data to the latest software version.
Page 28 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode VoIP Test Tool Click the VoIP Test Tool button to launch the VoIP Test Tool. This tool is identical to the VoIP Test Tool included with the Unified PC Maintenance Console for KX-TDA/KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs. IP Terminal Utility Click the IP Terminal button to launch the IP Terminal setup utility.
Page 29 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode Log in to Web Maintenance Console in On-line mode, and then use the "File Transfer PC to PBX" utility to upload the modified data to the PBX. • When programming in Off-line mode, be careful when programming the following parameters: –...
Page 30: Editing And Printing Terminal Labels In Off-Line Mode
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode 1.2.2.1 Editing and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode Follow the procedure below to print key label sheets for use with your system’s extensions and DSS consoles. In On-line mode, export PBX system data to your PC, and then open the exported data in Off-line mode. In On-line mode, use the File Transfer PBX to PC utility to save your system’s data and settings to your PC.
Page 31: Pbx Configuration Types
Multiple KX-NS1000 PBXs can be connected together in a configuration called a One-look network. One KX-NS1000 PBX serves as the Master unit, and other KX-NS1000 PBXs connect to the Master unit as Slave units. Slave unit PBXs receive settings and operation instructions from the Master unit PBX. With this configuration, it is easy to make network-wide changes by performing programming at only one PBX.
Page 32 One-look network. Programming is still performed by logging in to the PBX using Web Maintenance Console. A KX-NS1000 PBX (including the Master unit of a One-look network) can also connect to other PBXs using standards such as H.323. For details about other networking configurations, refer to 4.2.2 Network Type Comparison in the Feature Guide.
Page 33: One-Look Networking Survivability
1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types 1.2.3.1 One-look Networking Survivability A One-look network can be configured so that even if a site’s main PBX fails or is otherwise disconnected from the network, operation of the One-look Network as a whole continues. One-look Networking Survivability provides the following features: •...
Page 34 1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types PC Programming Manual...
Page 35: Introduction Of Web Maintenance Console
Section 2 Introduction of Web Maintenance Console This section serves as reference operating instructions when using Web Maintenance Console to programme the PBX. PC Programming Manual...
Page 36: Introduction
2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts 2.1 Introduction 2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts User account levels Access to Web Maintenance Console requires a login name and password, which are assigned to accounts in the PBX. Also, access to Web Maintenance Console is controlled by different levels of authorisation. The Installer level is the highest authorisation level.
Page 37 2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts Level Login Name Password Installer INSTALLER 4-16 character password, using a-z, A-Z, and 0-9 (case sensitive). For an initialised PBX that has not yet been set up, the default Installer level password is "1234". You will be prompted to choose a new password for the Installer level account when the Easy Setup Wizard is run (see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard).
Page 38: Access Levels
2.1.2 Access Levels 2.1.2 Access Levels Access to menu options within Web Maintenance Console is restricted depending on the level of the account and the current programming mode (see Programming Modes in 1.1.2 Introduction). When a menu option is limited to certain access levels, this is noted in this manual in the initial description of that menu option, for example: "This option is only available at Installer level."...
Page 39 2.1.2 Access Levels Menu Option Off-line On-line ü ü Import®SIP Extension Import®V-IPGW16 GW Settings ü ü ü ü Import®V-IPGW16 DN2IP ü ü Import®V-SIPGW16 Settings ü ü Import®V-SIPGW16 Provider ü ü ü ü Export®Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID ü ü...
Page 40 2.1.2 Access Levels Menu Option Off-line On-line File Transfer PC to PBX ü File Transfer PBX to PC ü File View ü File Delete ü Message File Transfer PC to PBX ü Message File Transfer PBX to PC ü Error Log ü...
Page 41 2.1.2 Access Levels Menu Option Off-line On-line CS-Web Connection ü ü PC Programming Manual...
Page 42: Logging In To Web Maintenance Console
2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console 2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console After establishing a connection to Web Maintenance Console (see 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console), the login window is displayed, and a login name and password must be entered. If this is the first time to log in to Web Maintenance Console, and the PBX is in its initialised, factory default state, you must log in using the Installer level account to begin the Easy Setup Wizard (see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard).
Page 43: Easy Setup Wizard
2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard In the Easy Setup Wizard, you will configure the mandatory settings required for the PBX. When you log in to Web Maintenance Console for a PBX that is in its initialised, factory default state, the Easy Setup Wizard for that PBX will launch automatically.
Page 44 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard 3 digits 3 digits 4 digits Extension, Extension Extension 4 digits Number Number DISA & UM channel Number of UM Group Extension Number 101–xxx 1001–xxxx 101–xxx Floating Extension Number UM Group 500–507 5000–5015 500–508 DISA (1-64) 536–599 5801–5864 5801–5864...
Page 45 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard Note • Full Automatic and Extension Number Input registration methods may not be available for certain types of IP terminals. In such cases, select the Manual registration method. • For more information about the IP terminal registration modes, refer to 5.9 Registering IP Telephones in the Installation Manual.
Page 46: Software Interface
2.1.5 Software Interface 2.1.5 Software Interface This section explains the functions of the various elements of the software interface. Main Window When you log in to Web Maintenance Console, the main window is displayed. For information about connecting to Web Maintenance Console and logging in, see 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console. The main window of Web Maintenance Console is divided into several areas, as shown below: Logged in Account Level The logged in account level is displayed.
Page 47 2.1.5 Software Interface Button Description Clicking this button will display the Setup Screen tree view items. From the Setup Screen, you can: • Configure PBX hardware and virtual cards • Programme settings for extensions and call handling • Configure network settings and auxiliary PBX functions Setup Screen •...
Page 48 2.1.5 Software Interface Item Primary Functions System Control • Download and update PBX software files • Manage music on hold (MOH) data • Reset or shutdown the system For details, see Section 5 System Control. Tool • Backup system data to a USB memory device •...
Page 49 2.1.5 Software Interface Site Selection Menu When you are logged in to the Master unit of a One-look network and you are viewing programming screens in the tree view, a site selection drop-down menu is displayed with each PBX site’s name and ID number. You can select a PBX site in the One-look network from the drop-down menu to programme items for that site.
Page 50: Card Status
2.1.6 Card Status 2.1.6 Card Status Certain tools, utilities and settings require that the target card be set to out-of-service (OUS) or in-service (INS) status before the operation is carried out. Where required, this is noted in the description of each item. Card status changes can be performed only in On-line mode (see Programming Modes in 1.1.2 Introduction).
Page 51: Extension Number Setting
2.1.7 Extension Number Setting 2.1.7 Extension Number Setting Many screens within the Maintenance Console software allow you to select extensions as part of programming various features (for example, as members of a group). These screens use a standard window to make selecting multiple extensions easy, accessed by clicking a button.
Page 52: Logout
2.2 Logout 2.2 Logout To logout of Web Maintenance Console, click the button to end the programming session and return to the Login screen. When this option is chosen, system data is automatically saved from the temporary memory (DRAM) of the PBX to the Storage Memory Card. To logout Click the button.
Page 53: Frequently Asked Questions (Faq)
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) This section provides answers to some common questions about using the Maintenance Console software to programme the PBX. The information is divided into the following topics: Title Description Connection Connecting to the PBX using Maintenance Console. Maintenance Console Software Using the Maintenance Console software.
Page 54 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) Card Status The status of a new card will not change to "INS". • With the new card installed, does the total number of extensions or trunks exceed the maximum supported by the PBX? • Is the type of card installed in the slot different from the card type set as "Pre-Install"...
Page 55 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • The Portable Station can be forcibly de-registered by following the procedure shown Forced De-registration of 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station. I changed the extension number of a Portable Station, but the display of the Portable Station still shows the old extension number.
Page 56 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • Select 3-digits for default value of Numbering Plan in the Easy Setup Wizard. If you want to change to a 3-digit extention numbering plan after the PBX system is already running using a 4-digit extension numbering plan, follow the procedure below. There are 2 methods of creating a 3-digit numbering plan, using 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main: Set the leading number to be 2 digits, with one additional digit.
Page 57 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) When modifying the Numbering Plan, how do I set a 1-digit extension number? • Perform the following steps: Clear the Leading Number cell. Click Apply. No. of Additional Digits to "None". Click Apply. Enter the desired value in the Leading Number cell.
Page 58 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items. The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by: • A feature number • An extension •...
Page 59 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • The following setting data is not saved to the Storage Memory Card, so will be deleted when the PBX is initialised. This data is stored in the PBX’s battery backup memory. • Advice of Charge (AOC) •...
Page 60 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • Trunk calls made by extensions can be restricted from the 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block screen. Click in the relevant cells to select the trunk groups that cannot be used by extensions associated with a particular COS in each time mode.
Page 61 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • Perform the following steps: On the 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List screen, from the ICD Group No. drop-down list, select the group you want to modify. The ICD group must have an extension number set. Enter the extension number of the extension you want to add in a blank cell of the Extension Number column.
Page 62 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) PC Programming Manual...
Page 63: Web Maintenance Console Home Screen
Section 3 Web Maintenance Console Home Screen This section explains how to setup the main PBX and other connected PBXs from the Home Screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 64: Home Screen
3.1 Home Screen 3.1 Home Screen The Home Screen of Web Maintenance Console provides an overall view of your One-look network, and allows you select a PBX to perform programming, or add a PBX to your One-look network. The Home Screen is displayed when you login to Web Maintenance Console.
Page 65 3.1 Home Screen Icon Description List View Click this button to view the following information in a list format: • Site status indicator • Site ID (1–16) • Site Name • Location (MIB) Specified at MIB info—SysLocation in 27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent.
Page 66 3.1 Home Screen If the PBX is operating as the Master Backup unit or is in Isolated mode, but the Master unit has been restored to normal operation, you can right-click the PBX’s icon and select Normal Mode to restore the PBX to normal operation.
Page 67: Home Screen-Add Site Wizard
3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard 3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard The Add Site Wizard, which is run from the Home Screen, will add KX-NS1000 PBXs to your One-look network as Slave units. Note • The PBX to be added must have been configured as a Slave unit using the Easy Setup Wizard. See 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard.
Page 68 3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard A removal status screen will be displayed. Each selected PBX will be removed one at a time. After each successful removal, a confirmation message will appear. Click Continue to proceed to the next PBX to remove.
Page 69: Status
Section 4 Status This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Status menu of the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 70: Status-Equipment Status
From the drop-down list, select the amount of remaining battery level for when to initiate PBX shutdown procedures. For more information about setting up a UPS system, refer to 4.13 Starting the KX-NS1000—Connecting an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) in the Installation Manual.
Page 71: Status-Equipment Status-Cs Information
4.1.2 Status—Equipment Status—CS Information 4.1.2 Status—Equipment Status—CS Information Displays information stored by the PBX regarding each Cell Station (CS). This option is only available for the Installer level account in On-line mode and requires that the target V-IPCS4 card be set to INS status. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description...
Page 72: Status-Equipment Status-Ps Information
4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information 4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information Displays Portable Station (PS) registration information, including the associated Cell Station (CS). This option is only available for the Installer level account in On-line mode. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description PS No.
Page 73: Status-Equipment Status-Um Port Status
4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status 4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status The UM Port status screen displays each port’s status and number for the Unified Messaging system. The screen will be updated every 30 seconds. Each port’s status will be displayed in one of the following ways: •...
Page 74: Status-Equipment Status-Usb
4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB 4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB USB Mount Status indicates if a USB memory device is connected to the PBX. There is also an Unmount button. • Mounted: A USB memory device is connected to the PBX. Before removing the USB memory device from the PBX, click Unmount.
Page 75: System Control
Section 5 System Control This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System Control menu of the Maintenance screen when programming using Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 76: System Control-Program Update
The programme files for the following hardware components can be updated with the Program Update feature. Each file must be named as indicated in the table to be recognised by the KX-NS1000. Hardware that can be updated using Program Update...
Page 77 5.1 System Control—Program Update Programme Type Target of Update File Name Firmware for PFPGA PFPGA KX-NS1000 PAPMIRNR PAPMIRNR PARMVDNR PARMVDNR PARMIREP PARMIREP PARMVDEP PARMVDEP PC300NR PC300NR PC300EP PC300EP PC300DAG PC300DAG Unified Messaging PFAX PFAX (UM) Programme CS Programmes CS using a CSIF card for DECT Portable Station PCSDECT CS using a CSIF card for 2.4 GHz Portable...
Page 78: System Control-Program Update-Download Program File
• When using an FTP server with this feature, the programme files to be downloaded to the KX-NS1000 PBX must be named on the FTP server in a specific way that includes the version number. Example: "PNT300_xxx_xxx_xxx" ("xxx_xxx_xxx" is the version number.)
Page 79 5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File To download programme files automatically For Download Server, select an FTP site. To specify a new FTP site, see 27.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP. For Download mode, select one of the following: • None: No actions are taken (automatic downloading is disabled). •...
Page 80: System Control-Program Update-Update Program File
5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File Once updated programme files have been downloaded and are stored on a PBX, they can be used to update the system files of the PBX. The update process can be set to be automatically performed at a specified time, or the update process can be carried out manually.
Page 81 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File Click Execute. The programme files will be updated to the specified PBXs at the specified time. Note • All PBXs in a One-look network must be using the same version of the software. When updating PBXs connected in a One-look network, note the following: –...
Page 82: System Control-Program Update-Plug And Update
5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update 5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update The Plug and Update feature allows IP-PTs to be automatically updated to the latest software version when they are registered to the PBX. When Plug and Update is enabled, the version number of the system software stored on the Master unit is compared to the system software currently in the IP-PT, after the IP-PT has been registered to the PBX.
Page 83: System Control-Moh
5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install 5.2 System Control—MOH 5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install Sound files on the programmer’s PC can be installed to each PBX for use as Music on Hold (MOH). This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Click Browse and select a WAV file to install as an MOH file. Only one file may be installed at a time. In the Select column, specify which PBX sites will install the sound file as an MOH file.
Page 84: System Control-Moh-Delete
5.2.2 System Control—MOH—Delete 5.2.2 System Control—MOH—Delete MOH files that are occupying BGM numbers can be deleted. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. In BGM No., specify the BGM numbers to delete MOH files from. Specify "All" to delete the data saved in all BGM numbers.
Page 85: System Control-Moh-Status / Backup
5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup 5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup MOH files stored on a PBX can be downloaded to the user’s PC. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. From Site No., select a PBX from which to download MOH files. The MOH files saved to the PBX will be listed.
Page 86: System Control-Fax Card
5.3 System Control—FAX Card 5.3 System Control—FAX Card This function is used to restart the optional FAX Card after it is installed in the PBX. For details about installing the FAX Card, refer to 4.3.4 FAX Card (KX-NS0106) in the Installation Manual. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 87: System Control-System Reset
5.4 System Control—System Reset 5.4 System Control—System Reset When programming changes or other changes to PBX settings require a system reset, this command allows a reset to be performed remotely from Web Maintenance Console. When the system is reset, any settings not saved to the Storage Memory Card are lost. A backup should be performed before the reset to ensure no data is lost.
Page 88: System Control-System Shutdown
5.5 System Control—System Shutdown 5.5 System Control—System Shutdown In order to turn off the power to a PBX, it must first be issued a shutdown command using Web Maintenance Console. Follow the procedure below to prepare a PBX for system shutdown. When the system is shut down, any settings not saved to the Storage Memory Card are lost.
Page 89: Tool
Section 6 Tool This section serves as reference for the Tool menu of the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 90: Tool-System Data Backup To Usb
USB cable must first be removed, then reconnected after the backup to USB has been completed. For details about the connection between the UPS and the PBX, refer to 4.13 Starting the KX-NS1000—Connecting an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) in the Installation Manual. Select the system data items to backup.
Page 91 6.1 Tool—System Data Backup to USB To minimise the potential of a failed backup, connect the USB memory device to a PC to confirm the USB memory device is operational and that the backup data is intact before starting this restore process. The PBX must be in a powered-off state.
Page 92: Tool-Bri Automatic Configuration
6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration 6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration Automatically configures the network settings of the BRI card. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode. This tool automatically inputs values into the fields L1 Mode, L2 Mode, Access Mode, and Mode, on the Network tab of the 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port screen.
Page 93: Tool-Ndss Link Data Clear
6.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear 6.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear Clears NDSS Link Data stored in the connected PBX. While this tool clears both monitor extension and monitored extension data, it only clears it at the connected PBX. To clear this data at other PBXs in the QSIG network, it is necessary to run this tool at those PBXs.
Page 94: Tool-Call Pickup For My Group
6.4 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group 6.4 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group Allows you to automatically configure settings in 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial and 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial so that users can answer calls to their Call Pickup Group by pressing " 0". To activate this tool When this tree menu item is selected, a confirmation screen will be displayed.
Page 95: Tool-Extension List View
6.5 Tool—Extension List View 6.5 Tool—Extension List View Displays a list of all programmed extension numbers and types. It is possible to sort the information according to Extension Number, Type, Extension Name, Site, Shelf, Slot, or Port. There is also a key-word searching feature.
Page 96: Tool-Import
6.6 Tool—Import 6.6 Tool—Import Allows several types of system data files or tables to be imported. Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level. The files from which data can be imported are files that were previously saved at this or another PBX using the Export tool (see 6.7 Tool—Export), or comma-separated value (CSV) files.
Page 97 6.6 Tool—Import ARS - Leading Digit Data Type Import Destination Location Location Leading Number Leading Digit Additional Number of Digits Additional Dial Digits Routing Plan Number Route Plan Number Related programming: 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number ARS - Except Code Data Type Import Destination Location...
Page 98 Location Dial Dial Phone Number Phone Number Related programming: 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial *: Refer to Notices Regarding Importing Data from KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs to the KX-NS1000 below. SIP Extension Data Type Import Destination Location Extension Number Extension Number...
Page 99 6.6 Tool—Import Data Type Import Destination Payload Type Payload Type T38 FAX Max Datagram T38 FAX Max Datagram T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy Redundancy T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages for T.30 messages T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data...
Page 100 Notices Regarding Importing Data from KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs to the KX-NS1000 Quick Dial The KX-NS1000 only supports an 8-digit Quick Dial format. Therefore, KX-TDE/KX-NCP Quick Dial data in the 4-digit format cannot be imported to the KX-NS1000. SIP Extension – Password KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs allow 3-digit passwords, but KX-NS1000 PBXs require password with 4 digits or more.
Page 101: Tool-Export
6.7 Tool—Export 6.7 Tool—Export Allows several types of system data to be exported to files. These files can be used with the Import tool (see 6.6 Tool—Import) to update another PBX. Except for ARS - Routing Plan, tables are exported as comma-separated value (CSV) files. Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.
Page 102: Tool-Screen Customise
6.8 Tool—Screen Customise 6.8 Tool—Screen Customise Allows you to specify which Setup and Maintenance screens can be accessed in the User (Administrator) account level. This option is only available at Installer level. Selected check boxes will be displayed in the tree menus of Web Maintenance Console to users with the User (Administrator) account level.
Page 103: Tool-Um Data Backup
6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup The UM Data Backup tool can be used to backup and restore Unified Messaging (UM) data. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The following voice data can be backed up or restored as individual files. The data can be backed up to a USB memory device connected to the PBX.
Page 104: Tool-Um Data Backup-Manual Backup
6.9.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup 6.9.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup Use this procedure to manually back up Unified Messaging system data. For details on the items that can be backed up, see 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup. To back up system prompts, select the check box next to System Prompts and select the check boxes of the items you want to back up.
Page 105: Tool-Um Data Backup-Scheduled Backup
6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup 6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup You can schedule backups in advance. The Unified Messaging system will automatically back up the selected data at the scheduled times to a USB memory device connected to the PBX. (Scheduled backups cannot be made to a local PC.) For details on the items that can be backed up, see 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup.
Page 106: Tool-Um Data Restore
New/Old/Deleted copy of the same message. • Voice data recorded by users in a KX-TVA/KX-TVM series VPS can be converted and used as voice data in the KX-NS1000’s Unified Messaging system. For details, refer to 5.3 Starting Web PC Programming Manual...
Page 107 6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore Maintenance Console—KX-TVA/KX-TVM System Prompt and Mailbox Data Import in the Installation Manual. PC Programming Manual...
Page 108: Tool-Um Backup History
6.11 Tool—UM Backup History 6.11 Tool—UM Backup History The following records for backup that have been performed can be checked on this screen: • Description • Parameters • Completion Status • Date & Time • Total Elapsed Time (HH:MM:SS) This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. PC Programming Manual...
Page 109: Tool-Dxdp All Ous
6.12 Tool—DXDP All OUS 6.12 Tool—DXDP All OUS Sets the status of all DXDP/XDP extension ports to "OUS" simultaneously for the currently selected site. To set all DXDP/XDP ports to OUS for the currently selected site Access Tool—DXDP All OUS from the Maintenance Screen tree view. Click OK.
Page 110: Tool-Contact Information
6.13 Tool—Contact information 6.13 Tool—Contact information Dealers can set contact information for the user of the PBX here. When users select this tree menu item, this information will be displayed for the user’s reference. Input the following information, and then click OK. •...
Page 111: Tool-Ut Option Setting
6.14 Tool—UT Option Setting 6.14 Tool—UT Option Setting Option settings can be specified for KX-UT series SIP phones on a system-wide level. Note The following apply when programming in On-line mode only: • To apply changes made to these settings for KX-UT series SIP phones connected to Slave unit PBXs in a One-look network, be sure to click the icon after programming.
Page 112: Tool-Url Information
6.15 Tool—URL Information 6.15 Tool—URL Information The URL addresses for downloading the IMAP tool and the Fax Driver can be specified on this screen. These URL addresses will be used for the Unified Messaging Plug in and Fax Driver Tool download buttons displayed to users when they view the Unified Message tab of their profile in the User menu.
Page 113: Utility
Section 7 Utility This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Utility menu of the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 114: Utility-Diagnosis
PBX. Test Type Available Cards Local loop back diagnosis KX-NS1000 PBXs: SLC2, LCOT2, BRI4, PRI Legacy Gateways: DHLC, DLC, SLC8, SLC16, MSLC16, ESLC16, EMSLC16, CSLC16, MCSLC16, ECSLC24, MCSLC24, CSIF, LCOT8, LCOT16, ELCOT, T1, E1, BRI2, BRI4, BRI8, PRI, OPB, E&M, DID...
Page 115 CS-INF loop back diagnosis* CSIF Super frame synchronization CSIF diagnosis* Caller ID card loop back diagnosis KX-NS1000 PBXs: LCOT2 Legacy Gateways: LCOT, ELCOT Extension mode setting test To perform a card test Click on the Status cell of the card to be tested, and set it to "OUS".
Page 116 7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis Note • Cards installed in KX-NS1000 PBXs and legacy gateway KX-NCP PBXs cannot be tested using this utility. • The cards to be used for testing must be installed in the same legacy gateway PBX. The tests that are performed are as follows: Line current OFF (Ext->CO)
Page 117: Utility-Diagnosis-Ping
7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping 7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping Performs a connection test on network devices. This function sends echo requests to a particular IP address across an IP network, and displays the result of responses and round-trip time. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. To perform a Ping test Enter a specific IP address in the IP Address box.
Page 118: Utility-File
7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX 7.2 Utility—File 7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX Copies PBX system data files from the connected PC to the Storage Memory Card installed in the PBX. Pre-existing files on the Storage Memory Card are overwritten. This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode.
Page 119: Utility-File-File Transfer Pbx To Pc
7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC 7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC Copies system data files from the Storage Memory Card installed in the PBX to the connected PC. This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode. The files that can be downloaded from the Storage Memory Card are as follows: File Name File Type...
Page 120: Utility-File-File View
7.2.3 Utility—File—File View 7.2.3 Utility—File—File View Displays a list of files on the Storage Memory Card. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The name, date and time of creation, and size of files are displayed. This utility can also display information on activation key files stored in the Storage Memory Card. The effective date, PCMPR-ID, activation key type, number of activation keys, and expiration date of activation keys are displayed on the Detail screen.
Page 121: Utility-File-File Delete
7.2.4 Utility—File—File Delete 7.2.4 Utility—File—File Delete Allows you to delete files from the Storage Memory Card. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode. The DCSYS system file cannot be deleted by this utility. Note Programme files cannot be deleted if the Program Update feature’s timed update is set, or if an update is currently being performed.
Page 122: Utility-File-Message File Transfer Pc To Pbx
7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX 7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the PC to the Storage Memory Card. This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode. Uploaded files are automatically renamed as necessary.
Page 123: Utility-File-Message File Transfer Pbx To Pc
7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC 7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the Storage Memory Card to the PC. This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode. To transfer OGMs to the PC From the lower drop-down list, select the messages to transfer.
Page 124: Utility-Log
7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log 7.3 Utility—Log 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log Collects and displays system error information. Whenever there is a system failure, the PBX stores the error code generated. The connected PC collects all of these codes, along with other information, and displays an explanatory error message. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 125 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log Sub Code Description Slot Type For physical slots (including physical slots of legacy gateway PBXs) – " " (blank) For KX-NS1000 virtual slots – "*" (asterisk) Shelf Number • – KX-NS1000 unit: 1 – Legacy gateway: 2–3 –...
Page 126: Utility-Log-Syslog
7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog 7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog Displays a log of system events. Each entry in the log includes the following information: • Type: Describes the type of system event. • Date: The date and time the system event occurred. • Message: Details about the system event. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 127: Utility-Log-Web-Mc Event Log
7.3.3 Utility—Log—Web-MC Event Log 7.3.3 Utility—Log—Web-MC Event Log The Web-MC Event Log retains information about user interaction with Web Maintenance Console. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The items displayed on screen are as follows: Item Description Date The date of the event.
Page 128: Utility-Log-Um System Log
7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log 7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log You can export a log of events from the Unified Messaging system for troubleshooting purposes. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Click OK to export a UM System Log file. Click Save to save the data to a local file.
Page 129: Utility-Monitor/Trace
From the Site-Shelf-Slot No. drop-down list, select the target slot. Each card will be preceded by a 3-digit number, following the pattern "XYZ": • X: Site number (1–16) • Y: Shelf number (1–3) – 1: KX-NS1000 physical shelf – 2: Legacy Gateway 1 – 3: Legacy Gateway 2 • Z: Slot number (1–11) From the Trace Data Type drop-down list, select the type of data to view.
Page 130: Utility-Monitor/Trace-V-Ipgw16 Protocol Trace
7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace 7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace This utility collects trace data of protocol activity from V-IPGW16 card. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode, and requires that the target V-IPGW16 card be set to INS status. To save trace data to the Storage Memory Card From the Utility menu, select V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace.
Page 131: Utility-Monitor/Trace-V-Sipgw16 Protocol Trace
7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW16 Protocol Trace 7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW16 Protocol Trace The trace data of protocol activity can be collected from the V-SIPGW16 card and saved to a PC using the V-SIPGW16 Protocol Trace. This option requires that the target V-SIPGW16 card be set to INS status. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
Page 132: Utility-Monitor/Trace-Cs Status Monitor
7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor 7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor This utility monitors the status of CSs. CSs receive data from other CSs that they are currently synchronised with. Current Sync CS information is displayed for IP-CSs that are in INS status. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
Page 133: Utility-Monitor/Trace-Fax - Protocol Trace
7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Protocol Trace 7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Protocol Trace This screen displays trace information for faxes sent and received by the PBX’s FAX Card. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The following information is recorded for each fax sent or received: •...
Page 134: Utility-Monitor/Trace-Fax - Task Sequence Trace
7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Task sequence Trace 7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Task sequence Trace This screen displays a log of events related to fax activity. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. To save a copy of the log, click Save Trace and follow the prompts. PC Programming Manual...
Page 135: Utility-Monitor/Trace-Um System Trace (Internal)
7.4.7 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal) 7.4.7 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal) Unified Messaging (UM) system processes can be monitored and logged. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The following data can be traced and logged for each UM port, or all UM ports: •...
Page 136: Utility-Monitor/Trace-T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor
7.4.8 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor 7.4.8 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor Displays reference signalling bit information for all channels of a T1 or E1 card that is installed in a legacy gateway by monitoring sent and received A, B, C and D bits. This utility is intended for use by dealers. For information about legacy gateways, see 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2.
Page 137: Utility-Monitor/Trace-T1/E1 Line Trace
7.4.9 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1/E1 Line Trace 7.4.9 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1/E1 Line Trace Traces the sent and received signalling bits and dial numbers on the specified channel of the T1 or E1 line of a card installed in a legacy gateway. This utility is intended for use by dealers. For information about legacy gateways, see 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2.
Page 138: Utility-Report
7.5.1 Utility—Report—Digital Trunk Error Report 7.5 Utility—Report 7.5.1 Utility—Report—Digital Trunk Error Report Displays accumulated information on various types of errors occurring on digital trunks. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode. The value displayed for each error item is the number of times that each error occurred during the time period selected.
Page 139: Utility-Report-Ip Extension Statistical Information
7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information 7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information Displays accumulated statistical information on IP extensions, V-IPEXT32 cards, V-IPCS4 cards, and the DSP card. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description Collection Started Time...
Page 140: Utility-Report-Um View Reports
7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports Unified Messaging (UM) system reports can be generated in order to monitor voice mail operations. Reports can be displayed on a PC, printed, or exported. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. To view a report In the View Report tab, select the desired report from the Report Parameters drop-down list.
Page 141 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports Report Type Description Call Account Report The call account report displays information about outgoing call activity. Information can be shown by UM port or by mailbox. The report includes date, starting time, used port, connection time, called telephone number, call type, exit status of each callout, total callouts number and the connection time for local or long distance call, and total number of outgoing calls.
Page 142 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports Report Type Description Security Information Report The security information report displays information about mailbox accesses. The report includes the date of the last change and last access, number of total accesses, login, and failed accesses. Hourly Statistics Report The hourly statistics report displays information about the number of incoming or outgoing calls, the connected time per hour, etc.
Page 143: Utility-Report-E-Mail Report
7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report 7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report A log of information about e-mail messages sent using the functions of the PBX can be viewed in the E-mail Report. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The information in the report includes the following items for each e-mail message sent: •...
Page 144: Utility-Activation Key Installation
7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation 7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation Activation keys for various features of the PBX can be installed using this screen. Activation key files are copied from a PC to the PBX and activated. Use the below procedure to install activation key files to a PBX. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 145: Utility-Email Notification
7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert 7.7 Utility—Email Notification 7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert You can specify e-mail addresses that will receive messages regarding the PBX’s status. System Alarm An e-mail message will be sent to the specified address when there is a system alarm. The e-mail message will contain details about the alarm.
Page 146: Utility-Email Notification-System Analysis
7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis 7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis Send a specific log file to the designated e-mail address(es). This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Check the Log File Type drop-down menu, select a log file to send to the e-mail address. Enter up to 2 e-mail addresses in Email Address 1 and Email Address 2.
Page 147: Utility-Email Notification-Test Email
7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email 7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email Send a test e-mail to confirm e-mail sending settings are correctly configured. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Enter up to 2 e-mail addresses in Email Address 1 and Email Address 2. In Subject, enter text to be used as the subject line of the e-mail sent.
Page 148: Utility-Command
7.8.1 Utility—Command—UM Command 7.8 Utility—Command 7.8.1 Utility—Command—UM Command System commands can be sent directly to the Unified Messaging system using the Commands dialogue. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Follow the steps below to use the Commands dialogue: Enter the desired command, then click RUN.
Page 149: Utility-Um - System Prompts Customisation
7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation The System Prompts customisation screen is used to view, play, add, or delete system prompts. The programmer can also check the prompt number and text for these prompts. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 150 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation Starting and Stopping System Prompt Playback Select the desired system prompts. Click Play/Record. Click Play or Stop. PC Programming Manual...
Page 151: Utility-Automatic Two-Way Recording
7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting 7.10 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting Specify the extensions of supervisors that will control the Automatic Two-way Recording feature for agent extensions. These settings may be changed by a programmer with a User (Administrator) account. Click Add/Delete.
Page 152: Utility-Automatic Two-Way Recording-Extension Setting
7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting 7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting Specify the Automatic Two-way Recording settings for each supervisor. These settings may be changed by a programmer with a User (Administrator) account. From the Select a Supervisor drop-down list, select a supervisor (specified in 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting).
Page 153: Utility-Automatic Two-Way Recording-Extension Setting List
7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List In this list you can view the settings of extensions that are programmed to have calls recorded by the Automatic Two-way Recording feature. Information for each extension, including the extension’s supervisor, UM Group number, and Automatic Two-way Recording destination mailbox is displayed.
Page 154: External Call
7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List Maintenance Console Location 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List Feature Guide References 3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager External Call Specifies whether trunk calls for the extension are automatically recorded. Value Range On, Off Maintenance Console Location 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List Feature Guide References...
Page 155 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List PC Programming Manual References 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting Feature Guide References 3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager UM Group No. Indicates the UM group number in which the two-way recording will be performed (reference only). Value Range Group number and group name Maintenance Console Location...
Page 156: Utility-Automatic Two-Way Recording-Maintenance
7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance 7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance Automatic Two-way Recording can be enabled or disabled, or set to record until a specified date and time by a programmer with a User (Administrator) account. To start Automatic Two-way Recording, click Start. The button will change to display Stop. Two-way recording for all designated extensions will continue until one of the following occurs: •...
Page 157: Utility-Um - System Maintenance
7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance 7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance Programme settings for Unified Messaging (UM) system maintenance. System Maintenance Mode Specifies whether to enable or disable System Maintenance Mode. System Maintenance Start Time Specifies the System Maintenance start time. After specifying the settings on this screen, click OK.
Page 158: Utility-Cs-Web Connection
7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection 7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection You can specify the URL of the Super Master CS for your system, which will be used for accessing online CS-Web system programming. For details about the Super Master CS and setting up SIP-CSs, refer to the SIP-CS Installation Guide.
Page 159: Users
Section 8 Users This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Users menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 160: Users-User Profiles
8.1 Users—User Profiles 8.1 Users—User Profiles Manage PBX settings on a per-user level. Information for each user account is displayed and can be added, edited, or and deleted by a User (Administrator) or Installer level account. Note For User (Administrator) accounts to change User (User) account settings, the Installer account must use the Screen Customise tool to allow User (Administrator) accounts to view the Users—User Profiles screen.
Page 161 8.1 Users—User Profiles Item Description FWD setting - call from Ext. Specifies the FWD destination for calls from extensions. Destination For settings and details for FWD/DND items, refer to the following: • 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND • 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND Note When a User (User) level account accesses this screen, he may view and edit items for his account as explained in 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User.
Page 162: Users-User Profiles-Advanced Setting
8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting When User (User) level accounts access their user profiles, they may view and edit items for their account as explained in 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User. In addition, some advanced settings can also be programmed by users.
Page 163 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Maintenance Console Location 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Feature Guide References 3.2.2.7 Call Transfer Scenario Call Transfer Status—VIP Filter Specifies whether calls from certain telephone numbers will be transferred directly to a specified extension or telephone number. Note This setting can only be set to "Enable"...
Page 164 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Maintenance Console Location 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Feature Guide References 3.2.2.7 Call Transfer Scenario Call Transfer Status—Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu Select a Custom Service from the drop-down menu if "Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu" is selected Call Transfer Status—Selection.
Page 165 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Call Transfer Status—Transfer to specified telephone number 2, 3, 4, 5 (Selection/Other) If "None" or "Call screening" is selected for Call Transfer Status—Selection, and the call could not be transferred to the number specified in Call Transfer Status—Transfer to specified telephone number - 1, the call will be transferred according to these settings for this scenario, in numerical order of priority.
Page 166 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Note More than one option can be selected. Value Range Leave a Message: Allows the caller to record a message. Transfer to a covering extension: Transfers the caller to a covering extension. Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging: Pages the subscriber by intercom. Transfer to operator: Transfers the caller to an operator.
Page 167: Users-Add User
8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User 8.2 Users—Add User 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User The Add User—Single User screen provides a method to create user accounts and establish PBX settings on a per-user level. When adding a user, the following settings can be specified. This screen will also be displayed with information already entered when editing an existing user.
Page 168 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User Item Description Email 1–3* Specifies the user’s e-mail address(es). Unified Message Item Description UM Group No. Select a UM group for the user from the drop-down list. Mailbox Number Enter the UM mailbox for the user. Class of Service Select a COS for the user from the drop-down list.
Page 169 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User Item Description Mailbox Password Click to specify the messaging client password for the mailbox. (Message client)* Note This setting requires the installation of an Activation Key for Unified Messaging E-mail Notification (KX-NSU2xx) for the number of users that will be accessing their UM mailbox using a client software programme.
Page 170 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User Login Account Item Description Login ID Set a login ID for the user. (4-16 characters in length) Note Login IDs must be unique for each user. Password* Set a password for the user. (4-16 characters in length) Re-enter* Re-enter the password for confirmation.
Page 171: Users-Add User-Multiple Users
8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users 8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users The Add User—Multiple Users screen provides a method to create multiple user profiles for a range of extensions at one time. In the From and To fields, specify the range of extensions to create profiles for. Select the Create mailboxes with the same number as the extensions check box if you want to create Unified Messaging mailboxes whose mailbox numbers are the same as the assigned extension numbers.
Page 172: Users-Automatic Two-Way Recording
8.3.1 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording 8.3 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording This screen is accessible only by users designated as Automatic Two-way Recording supervisors. See 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. 8.3.1 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording On this screen, a user designated as a supervisor may change Automatic Two-way Recording settings for extensions they are supervising.
Page 173: Users-Automatic Two-Way Recording-Record List
8.3.2 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List 8.3.2 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List Users designated as supervisors can view and play messages recorded using the Automatic Two-way Recording feature. Select a UM group number from the Select a Destination UM-Group No. drop-down list. Click List View to display a list of the Automatic Two-way Recording mailboxes of the selected UM group.
Page 174 8.3.2 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List PC Programming Manual...
Page 175: Pbx Configuration-[1] Configuration
Section 9 PBX Configuration—[1] Configuration This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Configuration menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 176: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot
9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot The operating characteristics associated with each service card can be programmed. Move the mouse pointer over an installed card to display the menu of options for that card. To view a summary of status and versions for all cards installed in the PBX, click the Summary button (see 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary).
Page 177 Install the STACK-M card and connect the legacy gateway PBX to the STACK-M card using the supplied stacking cable. For details, refer to 4.6 Stacking Cards in the KX-NS1000 Installation Manual. In the Configuration—Slot physical shelf screen, click on the STACK-M card in the list on the right.
Page 178 Legacy-GW1 or Legacy-GW2 on the slot screen to programme the PBXs connected to the STACK-M card. • For information about hardware configuration restrictions and conditions for legacy gateways, refer to Conditions for Connecting Legacy Gateways in 4.6 Stacking Cards in the KX-NS1000 Installation Manual. Supported Card Types Card...
Page 179 Indicates the physical or virtual shelf where the card, extension, or device is located in the PBX. • Shelf "1" is the physical shelf of the KX-NS1000 PBX. • Shelf "2" corresponds to the physical shelf of the PBX connected to Legacy Gateway 1.
Page 180: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Summary
9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary Summary information is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX. Click one of the following buttons to view a summary of the shelf in the PBX: • Physical: View the physical card shelf. •...
Page 181 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary IDLE: No card is installed in the slot. Maintenance Console Location 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary PC Programming Manual References 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Version Indicates the software version of the installed card (reference only). Value Range Version number Maintenance Console Location 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary...
Page 182 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary Maintenance Console Location 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary PC Programming Manual References 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Status Indicates the card status (reference only). Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Page 183 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Pre-Install: A card has been added to the slot. Maintenance Console Location 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary PC Programming Manual References 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Version Indicates the software version of the installed card (reference only).
Page 184: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Activation Key Status
9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status Refreshes and displays information about activation keys provided by any activation key files on the Storage Memory Card and by pre-installed activation keys on the mother board. To access this screen, click the Activation Key button on the Configuration—Slot main screen.
Page 185 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status Maintenance Console Location 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status Activated Feature Indicates the type of activation keys (reference only). Note that the types of activation keys are subject to change without notice. For CA activation keys, refer to the documentation for CA.
Page 186 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status Features in total Indicates the total number of channels (or CA users) provided by the mother board and activation key files on the Storage Memory Card (reference only).
Page 187: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-System Property
9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property The properties of the PBX system can be specified. Main DSP CODEC G.711 only (SIP extension) Specifies whether or not to only use the G.711 codec for SIP extension calls. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 188: System Status
9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property PC Programming Manual References 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property—Option— System Speed Dial Download System Status CPU Usage Displays the system CPU’s current processor load, expressed as a percentage of total capacity (reference only).
Page 189 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Value Range Inband, Outband (RFC2833), Outband (H.245) Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Payload Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833. Programming this parameter is only necessary if DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833). Value Range 96–127 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 190 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Value Range 1024–65534 Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Multisite message UDP port number Specifies the UDP port to be used for Type 2 message communication between the Master unit and Slave units. Value Range 1024–65535 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 191 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Gatekeeper Connection Checking Interval (*60s) Specifies the time between periodic checks of connection to the gatekeeper. Value Range 0 (disabled), 1–1440 Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Terminal type to Gatekeeper Specifies the connection service type notified to the gatekeeper.
Page 192 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Primary Gatekeeper Port Number Specifies the port number of the primary gatekeeper. Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Secondary Gatekeeper IP Address Specifies the IP address of the secondary gatekeeper.
Page 193 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property RAS Port Number Specifies the port number for the H.225 protocol (RAS) in an H.323 protocol suite. Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property QSIG Connectionless Tunneling TCP Port Number Specifies the TCP port number for connectionless tunnelling between gateway devices at different locations in a QSIG network.
Page 194 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property GW IP Address Specifies the IP address of the destination gateway device. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property GW Group Specifies the number of the gateway group to which the gateway entry belongs.
Page 195 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Progress Tone Send Mode Specifies whether to send call progress tones to the destination. When selecting External, call progress tones are audible at the destination. Value Range External, Internal Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property...
Page 196 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location...
Page 197 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property FAX Sending Method Specifies the method of transporting the fax signal. Value Range G.711 Inband, T.38 Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Maximum Bit Rate Specifies the maximum bit rate of the fax signal. Value Range No Speed Limit, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 7200 bps, 9600 bps, 12000 bps, 14400 bps Maintenance Console Location...
Page 198 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Payload Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833. Programming this parameter is only necessary if DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833). Value Range 96–127 Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property GW Settings–Option 3 GW Name Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference.
Page 199 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data Specifies the redundancy count for data when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range 0–3 Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property T38 FAX Rate Management Method Specifies the rate management method when using the T.38 protocol.
Page 200 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property GW No./GW Group Selection Specifies the type of destination when making calls: a gateway device or a gateway group. Value Range GW Group, GW No. Maintenance Console Location 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property GW Group Specifies the number of the destination gateway group.
Page 201: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Site Property
9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property The properties of the PBX site can be specified. When you place the mouse cursor over the Site Property button, Main, FAX Card, and NSVM buttons are displayed. Click a button to open that site property screen. 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Overall settings for the PBX site can be specified.
Page 202 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property PC Programming Manual References 1.2.3.1 One-look Networking Survivability Feature Guide References 4.2.3.1 Backup Master Mode and Isolated Mode P2P Group Specifies the peer-to-peer group of the site. Value Range 1–256 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 203 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main PC Programming Manual References 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard VoIP-DSP Options The settings in this tab relate to IP extensions and IP trunks. IP Extension Count of BGM Specifies how many IP-PTs connected to the mother board can send out BGM. Value Range 0–117 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 204 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Jitter Compensation Operation for G.729A Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for communications using the G.729A codec. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Jitter Buffer Delay Min.
Page 205 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Value Range 1000–65530 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Jitter Buffer Delay Min. for FAX Specifies the minimum size of the jitter buffer for fax communications. Value Range 0–200 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Jitter Buffer Delay Max.
Page 206 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main DTMF Detection Level for G.711A Specifies the level of DTMF detection for the G.711A codec. Value Range -45– -12 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property DTMF Detection Level for G.711Mu Specifies the level of DTMF detection for the G.711Mu codec. Value Range -39–...
Page 207 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property CNG Signal Fixation Detection Pattern Specifies the CNG signal pattern to be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation. Value Range OFF, ON Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property CED Signal Fixation Detection Time Specifies the minimum length of time required for the CED (called station identification) signal to be detected...
Page 208 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main VoIP-DSP Options 2 The settings in this tab relate to communications within a One-look network. Echo Cancellation Ability Specifies the echo cancellation ability time. Value Range 64 ms, 128 ms, Off Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.
Page 209 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Jitter Compensation Operation for G.711 Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for voice communications using the G.711 codec. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 210 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Jitter Buffer Delay Init. for Voice Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer for voice communications. Value Range 0–200 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Jitter Buffer Adaptation Period for Voice Specifies the length of time that the jitter buffer is applied for voice communications.
Page 211 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Packet Sampling Time (G.729A) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Port Number...
Page 212 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main UDP Port No. for SIP Extension Server Specifies the UDP port number used for the SIP Extension server. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value. Value Range 1024–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Guide References...
Page 213 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection Data Transmission Protocol (HTTPS) Port No. for SIP-MLT Specifies the HTTPS port of the PBX-side ACS for data communication with KX-UT series SIP phones. Value Range 0–65535 (Setting "0"...
Page 214: Sip Extension
9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Value Range 1024–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 9— Built-in Communication Assistant 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 9— Built-in Communication Assistant Feature Guide References 2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant) LAN Status...
Page 215 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension SIP Location Hold Time Min. Specifies the minimum length of time that the PBX holds information on the location of SIP Extensions. Value Range 10–3600 s Maintenance Console Location...
Page 216 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server IP Address Specifies the outside-facing IP address or host name of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 (IP address), Max.
Page 217 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server (HTTP) Port No. Specifies the outside-facing HTTP port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections used for downloading data to KX-UT series SIP phones. Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 218 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port Specifies the outside-facing port of the network gateway connected to the SIP proxy server. Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - NTP Server IP Address...
Page 219 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Value Range Register, Blank UDP, None Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Time (s) Specifies the time interval between transmissions of the Keep Alive packet.
Page 220 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Setting parameters for Networking Survivability, assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server IP Address Specifies the outside-facing IP address or host name of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections that is used when the gateway specified in Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT is not available. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 (IP address), Max.
Page 221 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Control Condition of Remote SIP-MLT—PERIODIC Ability Specifies whether alive monitoring is performed for connected remote extensions. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection Control Condition of Remote SIP-MLT—PERIODIC Packet Sending Interval Time Specifies the polling interval for alive monitoring when PERIODIC Ability is set to "Enable".
Page 222 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property DSP Digital Gain (Up) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path. Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.
Page 223 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main DSP Digital Gain (Up) on V-SIPEXT side for conference Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path for conference calls using an extension of a V-SIPEXT card. Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property DSP Digital Gain (Up) on V-UTEXT side for conference Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path for conference calls using an extension of a V-UTEXT...
Page 224 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property DSP Digital Gain (Down) on TDM side for conference Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path for conferencing using TDM circuit mode communication. Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property...
Page 225: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Site Property-Fax Card
9.5.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—FAX Card 9.5.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—FAX Card Information and settings for the FAX Card for the PBX site can be confirmed and specified. Status Indicates if a FAX Card is installed in the PBX (reference only). Value Range Installed, None Maintenance Console Location...
Page 226: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Site Property-Nsvm
9.5.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—NSVM 9.5.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—NSVM Settings related to audio quality and sound detection for the PBX site can be specified. Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property DSP Digital Gain (Down)
Page 227 9.5.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—NSVM NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property FAX Detection Ability Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. Since fax signals using a codec other than G.711 cannot be received accurately at the destination, this feature automatically switches the codec to G.711 to enable end-to-end fax signal relay over the network.
Page 228 9.5.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—NSVM Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property CNG Signal Fixation Detection Pattern Specifies the CNG signal pattern to be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation. Value Range OFF, ON Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property Maximum Silence Time Specifies the length of time of silence that the PBX will detect as the end of a call.
Page 229 9.5.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—NSVM Value Range 1000–60000 (ms) Maintenance Console Location 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property PC Programming Manual...
Page 230: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Um Card Property
9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property The properties of the Unified Messaging (UM) system can be specified. Main Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property DSP Digital Gain (Down)
Page 231 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property FAX Detection Ability Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. Since fax signals using a codec other than G.711 cannot be received accurately at the destination, this feature automatically switches the codec to G.711 to enable end-to-end fax signal relay over the network.
Page 232 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property Maintenance Console Location 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property CNG Signal Fixation Detection Pattern Specifies whether or not the Unified Messaging system will respond to CNG signals. Value Range OFF, ON Maintenance Console Location 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property PC Programming Manual...
Page 233: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Um Port Property
9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property 9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property The properties of the Unified Messaging (UM) system’s ports can be specified. Main The Port for each item is displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port.
Page 234: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property-Port Type View
9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type View 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type View Displays the number of connected telephones, devices, and Cell Stations (CSs). This screen can be accessed from the Port Property screen of any extension cards in use in the PBX system, including extension cards of legacy gateways.
Page 235: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Sipgw-Shelf Property
9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property Common settings for all of the V-SIPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed. Icon Description In this section, the following icons show the different parameter type. Icon Description for Parameter Type Manual programming is compulsory under certain conditions.
Page 236 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property NAT - Keep Alive Packet Sending Ability Specifies whether to send Keep Alive packets in order to maintain the NAT binding information. This setting may be compulsory depending on the network conditions. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 237 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property STUN Ability Specifies whether to open a protocol port of the STUN server to enable STUN feature. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property STUN Client Port Number Specifies the port number of the PBX used for communications with the STUN server. Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 238 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property Symmetric Response Routing Ability Enables this feature to request that the SIP server sends the response back to the source IP address and port from which the request originated. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 239 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property SIP QoS-ToS Priority Specifies the priority level in the ToS field when "ToS" is selected in SIP QoS Ability. Value Range 0–7 Maintenance Console Location 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property SIP QoS-ToS Type Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field when "ToS" is selected in SIP QoS Ability.
Page 240: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Sipgw-Card Property
9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Card Property 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Card Property Common card settings for all of the V-SIPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed. DNS SRV Record Resolve Ability Specifies whether to request that the DNS server translates domain names into IP addresses using the DNS SRV record.
Page 241: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Sipgw-Port Property
9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Programming Port Properties Some of the parameters can be automatically programmed by selecting the desired SIP provider for each virtual SIP gateway port. Icon Description In this section, the following icons show the different parameter type. Icon Description for Parameter Type Programmed automatically by selecting the desired SIP provider in Select Provider.
Page 242 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Ensure that the Trunk Adaptor is connected to the network and a power supply, and that all ports to be set are OUS. Click Trunk Adaptor. The Trunk Adaptor List screen is displayed. Enter a name (20 characters or less) for the Trunk Adaptor in Trunk Adaptor Name. Enter the Trunk Adaptor’s IP address in Trunk Adaptor IP Address.
Page 243 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range SIP Provider, Trunk Adaptor Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.3.2 Trunk Adaptor Connection Trunk Property Specifies the networking type of each SIP trunk. Note Connection Attribute is set to "Trunk Adaptor" for the port, only "Public" will be available for this setting. Value Range Public, VPN Maintenance Console Location...
Page 244 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property SIP Server Name Specifies the domain name of the SIP proxy server. Note Specify the domain name of the outbound proxy server, if provided by the SIP provider. Value Range Max.
Page 245 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range Max. 100 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Subscriber Number Specifies the number used as the CLIP number. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, , and #) Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Backup Specifies if the port will be used in Master Backup mode to perform the functions of a port on the Master unit...
Page 246 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property This option is only available in On-line mode. Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property User Name Specifies the user name (SIP Account) provided by the SIP provider.
Page 247 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode. Value Range INS: The port is in service.
Page 248 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range Max. 100 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Register Server IP Address Specifies the IP address of the SIP server. This setting is compulsory when a register IP address is provided. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 249 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property STUN Server—Name Specifies the domain name of a STUN server. Value Range Max.
Page 250 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode. Value Range INS: The port is in service.
Page 251 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Session Incoming Refresher Request Specifies the type of method used for establishing the session interval. Value Range UAC, UAS Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property SIP 200 Response Timer (*100 ms) Specifies the amount of time to wait for a SIP 200 (OK) response when establishing a connection between two parties.
Page 252 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode. Value Range INS: The port is in service.
Page 253 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range User Name, Authentication ID, PBX-CLIP Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property P-Preferred-Identity Header—SIP-URI Specifies the complete SIP-URI address of the P-Preferred-Identity header. The configuration in P-Preferred-Identity Header—User Part will be invalid if this parameter is set. Value Range Max.
Page 254 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Anonymous format in "From" header Specifies the format of the "From" header when not sending caller ID. Value Range Display name and SIP-URI, Display name only Note If "Display name and SIP-URI"...
Page 255 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Number Format Specifies the format of an incoming call number. Value Range International, +International, National Maintenance Console Location...
Page 256 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property MEX - Additional Dial Specifies additional digits to be inserted before the dialled number of an incoming call from a MEX-enabled mobile device. Value Range Max. 7 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Voice/FAX...
Page 257 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Page 258 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Inform Annex B Status (G.729A) Specifies whether to inform that Annex B for the G.729 codec is not supported. Value Range Disable, Enable Note Annex B expansion features for the G.729 codec are not supported by the V-SIPGW16 card. However, it is necessary to inform some carriers of this fact to avoid having calls disconnected.
Page 259 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property DTMF Specifies the method to transport DTMF tones. Value Range Inband, Outband (RFC2833), Outband (SIP INFO) Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Payload Type Specifies the payload type of RFC2833 for DTMF tones. Note Manual programming is required if DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833).
Page 260 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property RTP QoS-ToS Priority Specifies the priority level in the ToS field. Value Range 0–7 Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property RTP QoS-ToS Type Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field. Value Range Normal, Monetary Cost, Reliability, Throughput, Delay Maintenance Console Location...
Page 261 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property RTCP Packet Interval Specifies the interval time until the next RTCP packet is sent. Value Range 5–60 s Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Keep Alive Timer Specifies the length of time to send Keep Alive packets for the connection.
Page 262 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property T38 FAX Max Datagram Specifies the maximum datagram size when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range 272–512 Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy Specifies whether to enable the redundancy feature when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 263 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Reject T.38 Request from Network Specifies whether T.38 protocol data requests are rejected or accepted. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property T.38 Option The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference.
Page 264 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property T38 FAX QoS-ToS Type Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range Normal, Monetary Cost, Reliability, Throughput, Delay Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property T38 FAX QoS-DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ when using the T.38 protocol.
Page 265 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property...
Page 266 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Supplementary Service The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 267 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property CLIR Specifies whether to allow restriction of the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a SIP trunk call. Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property CNIP (Send) Specifies whether to send the caller’s name to be displayed on the called party’s telephone when making a SIP trunk call.
Page 268 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Diversion Header Enable this setting to allow the specified SIP trunks to detect incoming Mobile Device Access calls from MEX-enabled mobile devices. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property PC Programming Manual...
Page 269: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipgw16-Shelf Property
9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Common settings for all of the V-IPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed. Main Gatekeeper Available Specifies whether to use a gatekeeper. This setting can only be changed when all V-IPGW cards are set to OUS.
Page 270 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property RTP QoS-ToS Priority Specifies the priority level in the ToS field. Value Range 0–7 Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property RTP QoS-ToS Type Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field. Value Range Normal, Monetary Cost, Reliability, Throughput, Delay Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property...
Page 271 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T38 FAX QoS-ToS Priority Specifies the priority level in the ToS field when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range 0–7 Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T38 FAX QoS-ToS Type Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field when using the T.38 protocol.
Page 272 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.
Page 273 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Feature Guide References...
Page 274: Incoming Call
9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Trunk Property Indicates the networking type of each trunk. Value Range Public, Private, VPN Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Outgoing Call First-digit Timer (T302-1) Specifies the length of time within which the first digit of a dial number must be dialled after seizing a virtual IP trunk.
Page 275 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Voice Codec Priority 1st Specifies the highest priority codec type. For fax communications, it is necessary to specify G.711A or G. 711Mu for this parameter. Value Range G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A Maintenance Console Location...
Page 276 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Packet Sampling Time for G.711Mu Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location...
Page 277 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Maximum Bit Rate Specifies the maximum bit rate of the fax signal. Value Range No Speed Limit, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 7200 bps, 9600 bps, 12000 bps, 14400 bps Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property DTMF...
Page 278 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 messages when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range 0–7 Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data...
Page 279 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving. Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T303 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message.
Page 280 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T309 Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call. Value Range 0–3000 ´...
Page 281 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T318 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message. Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property T319 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Suspend message. Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 282 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property Maintenance Console Location 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property PC Programming Manual...
Page 283: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipgw16-Shelf Property-Gk Settings
9.12.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property—GK Settings 9.12.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property—GK Settings Gatekeeper registration information can be programmed. Destination Number Specifies a telephone number to register with a gatekeeper. Value Range Max. 30 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 9.12.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property—GK Settings Device Name Specifies the name of the device for programming reference.
Page 284: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Shelf Property - Virtual Ip Gateway-Hunt Pattern
9.12.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern 9.12.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern The related settings of hunt patterns can be programmed. The hunt pattern determines how to route incoming calls through virtual IP trunks to the PBX. A maximum of 32 hunt patterns can be programmed.
Page 285: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipgw16-Port Property
9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP Gateway port. The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Trunk Adaptor To connect to a Trunk Adaptor, follow the steps below.
Page 286: Call Distribution Port Group
9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property Call Distribution Port Group Specifies a call distribution port group to which incoming trunk calls are directed through the virtual VoIP gateway port. Value Range 1–48 Maintenance Console Location 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property Feature Guide References 4.3.2.3 Call Distribution Port Group PC Programming Manual...
Page 287: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipext32-Card Property
The properties of the V-IPEXT card can be specified. Signalling (PTAP) UDP Port No. (Server) Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPEXT card to transmit and receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
Page 288 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) First Resending Time (PTAP) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Page 289 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property Maintenance Console Location 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) First Resending Time (MGCP) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data.
Page 290 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property Maintenance Console Location 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path. Note For KX-NT500 series phones, in place of this setting, the setting for DSP Digital Gain (Down) in 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property—Main is applied.
Page 291 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Note For KX-NT500 series phones, in place of this setting, the setting for NLP Setting in 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property—Main is applied.
Page 292: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipext32-Port Property
9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP extension port. IP-PT Registration and De-registration An IP-PT must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and IP-PT before it can be used. Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
Page 293 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Click Forced De-registration. A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click Next. A dialogue box will appear.
Page 294 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode. Value Range INS: The port is in service.
Page 295 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Current IP Address Indicates the current IP address of the IP-PT (reference only). Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Program Ver. Indicates the programme software file version of the IP-PT (reference only). Value Range Version number Maintenance Console Location...
Page 296 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Value Range P2P Group Name Maintenance Console Location 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property PC Programming Manual References 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main— P2P Group Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection Option The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 297 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode. Value Range INS: The port is in service.
Page 298 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property IP Codec Priority Specifies the codec used for compression and decompression of transmitted data. Some codecs may become unavailable depending on the value set here, as follows: – When G.722 is selected, the priority is G.722 ® G.711 ® G.729A. When G.711 is selected, the priority is G.711 ®...
Page 299 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property ANNOUNCE Mode Specifies if the extension’s built-in ANNOUNCE feature is enabled. A KX-NT265, KX-NT300 series, or KX-NT500 series phone in a remote location with ANNOUNCE enabled can provide the PBX’s IP Address information to other terminals in the remote location in place of manually programming the PBX’s IP address at each terminal.
Page 300 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Primary ports of extensions that have secondary ports assigned are displayed on the left. Select the extensions whose secondary setting you want to remove, and then click the right arrow. Click Execute. A message confirming the setting removal will be displayed. The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference.
Page 301 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Primary/Secondary Specifies the designation of the port as a primary port or secondary port.
Page 302 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property Pair Slot Indicates the number of the virtual card slot in the site where the assigned secondary port is located (reference only). Note A value will be displayed here only after the Set Secondary command has been executed (see above). Value Range Virtual slot number Maintenance Console Location...
Page 303: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Sipext32-Card Property
9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property The properties of the virtual SIP Extension card can be specified. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value. Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location...
Page 304 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location...
Page 305: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Sipext32-Port Property
9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for each virtual SIP extension port. The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port.
Page 306 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Current IP Address Indicates the current IP address of the SIP Extension (reference only). Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension...
Page 307 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Packet Sampling Time (G.729A) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location...
Page 308 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property PC Programming Manual References 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main— P2P Group 11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection PC Programming Manual...
Page 309: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipcs4-Card Property
The properties of the V-IPCS card can be specified. Signalling (PTAP) UDP Port No. (Server) Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPCS card to transmit and receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
Page 310 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property First Resending Time (PTAP) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Page 311 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property First Resending Time (MGCP) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value. Value Range 500 ´...
Page 312 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location...
Page 313: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipcs4-Port Property
9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP-CS port. IP-CS Registration and De-registration An IP-CS must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and IP-CS before it can be used. Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
Page 314 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Click Confirm. If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed". Click Close. Once the IP-CS is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-CS will update to show "None". Main The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 315 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Value Range 00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF Maintenance Console Location 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Current IP Address Indicates the current IP address of the IP-CS (reference only). Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Program Ver.
Page 316 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property CS Name Specifies the CS name of the port. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.
Page 317 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property Voice Activity Detection for G.711 Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 codec.
Page 318: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Utext32-Card Property
9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property Various settings can be programmed for V-UTEXT32 cards. Click Common Settings to change these settings. Main Echo Cancellation Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property DSP Digital Gain (Down)
Page 319 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property PERIODIC Inform Specifies whether alive monitoring is performed for connected extensions. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 320 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property Maintenance Console Location 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property Failover Timer (For S-PS/SIP-CS) Specifies the time period after which a SIP-CS that cannot connect to its primary PBX will re-route to its assigned secondary PBX. Note For SIP-CSs, primary PBX and secondary PBX settings must be made through the Web programming interface of the Master SIP-CS or through configuration file programming.
Page 321: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Utext32-Port Property
9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for the ports of V-UTEXT32 cards. KX-UT Series SIP Phone, S-PS, and SIP-CS Registration and De-registration A KX-UT series SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS before it can be used.
Page 322 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Forced De-registration Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register a SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS when normal de-registration has been unsuccessful or IP address settings have been changed or deleted only on the target device. Click Forced De-registration.
Page 323 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Telephone Type Specifies the connected device type. Note • This setting cannot be changed if a device has already been registered for the port. De-register the device set for the port before changing the setting.
Page 324 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Password Specifies the password used for registering a SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS to the PBX. This parameter can only be modified when the virtual SIP extension port is set to OUS. Value Range 4–16 characters (consisting of 0–9, a–z, A–Z) Maintenance Console Location...
Page 325 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Current IP Address Indicates the current IP address of the SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS (reference only). Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Program Ver.
Page 326 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property P2P Group Name Indicates the selected peer-to-peer group’s name (reference only). Value Range P2P Group Name Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property PC Programming Manual References 11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection Option The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference.
Page 327 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property System Speed Dial Download Specifies if the connected SIP phone will download system speed dial entries from the PBX.
Page 328 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Value Range G.722, G711A, G.729A, G711Mu, None Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Packet Sampling Time Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms Maintenance Console Location...
Page 329 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Gain Type Specifies the type of gain file to distribute to connected SIP devices. Value Range Default, Type1, Type2, Type3 Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Secondary Setting The settings on this screen are for programming the Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX feature for use among IP extensions in a networked environment.
Page 330 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port. Note This setting cannot be changed on this screen until the port has been assigned as a secondary port using the Set Secondary command. See Setting Secondary Ports above for details. Value Range Max.
Page 331 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Value Range Primary, Secondary Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 4.2.3.2 Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX Pair Site Indicates the site where the assigned secondary port is located (reference only). Note A value will be displayed here only after the Set Secondary command has been executed (see above).
Page 332 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Note A value will be displayed here only after the Set Secondary command has been executed (see above). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Feature Guide References 4.2.3.2 Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX Remote Place The settings on this screen are for programming the Simple Remote Connection feature for connecting SIP phones in remote locations to the PBX.
Page 333 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Phone Location Specifies the type of extension connected to the port. Value Range Local: The extension is located on the same network as the PBX (standard configuration).
Page 334 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property Note A total of 20 HTTPS connections can be set per PBX site. If "HTTPS" is selected but the total number of HTTPS connections available at the site will be exceeded by changing this setting, a warning message will be displayed and the setting change will be cancelled.
Page 335: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot- Slc2 - Card Property
9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property The property for the extension cards can be specified. SLT Pulse Dial Mode Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area. Value Range Normal, Sweden, New Zealand Maintenance Console Location...
Page 336 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property SLT Pulse Minimum Make Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial. Value Range 8 ´ n (n=1–5) ms Maintenance Console Location 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property SLT Flash Detection Enables the PBX to detect the flash signal sent when an SLT user presses the hookswitch or the Flash/Recall button.
Page 337 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property DTMF-R STD Detection Time Specifies the minimum length that a DTMF tone must be for the PBX to recognise it as a DTMF tone. Value Range 2 ´ n (n=1–31) ms Maintenance Console Location 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—...
Page 338: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Slc2 - Port Property
9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property Various settings can be programmed for each extension port. To view the total number of each type of extension connected, click Port Type View. The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 339 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property Maintenance Console Location 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the port.
Page 340: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property - Lco Type
9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type The properties of the analogue trunk cards can be specified. Outgoing Guard Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line. Value Range 3–6 s Maintenance Console Location...
Page 341 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Maintenance Console Location 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Bell Detection—Bell Off Detection Timer Specifies the duration of the bell off detection timer. If the PBX receives no bell signal from the telephone company for the length of time specified here, the PBX treats the call as lost.
Page 342 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type PC Programming Manual References 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Low Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a low speed pulse dial. Low Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.
Page 343 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type High Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a high speed pulse dial. High Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here. Value Range 12+ (4 ´...
Page 344 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Maintenance Console Location 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Max Receive Time Specifies the maximum number of Caller ID series that are sent from the network. Value Range 0 (no limit), 1, 2, 3 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 345 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Header Examination Enables the PBX to check the header of received Caller ID information. To enable this setting, Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 346 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) Start Code 1 and Start Code 2 Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series. Start Code 1 is prior to Start Code Value Range None, *, #, A, B, C, D Maintenance Console Location...
Page 347 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID Header[03] Selects the type of the 3rd header in a Caller ID signal.
Page 348: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property - Lco Port
9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Various settings can be programmed for each analogue trunk port. The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 349 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected when a CPC signal is not detected.
Page 350 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Feature Guide References 2.5.4.5 Reverse Circuit Caller ID Detection Enables the PBX to detect a Caller ID signal from the analogue trunk. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port PC Programming Manual References 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Guide References...
Page 351 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Feature Guide References 2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion 2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) 2.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code Flash Time Specifies the length of a flash signal. Value Range None, 16 ´...
Page 352: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property - Bri Type/Pri Type
9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type The properties of the BRI or PRI card can be specified. ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T200 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN. Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 353 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Value Range 0–18000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving. Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 354 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T308 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message from ISDN. Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 355 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T318 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message. Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 356 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T3D9 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode. Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN Extension—T200...
Page 357 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN Extension—T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving. Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 358 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN Extension—T306 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message to ISDN. This setting is used when inband tones are supplied. Value Range 0–3000 ´...
Page 359 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN Extension—T312 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to ISDN.
Page 360 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN Extension—T3D9 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode. Value Range 0–3000 ´...
Page 361: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property - Bri Port
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Various settings can be programmed for each BRI port. Main The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 362 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Status Message Specifies whether the Status Message is sent to the network. Value Range No Transmission: Status Message is not sent. When Mandatory error detection: Send the Status Message when an error (Mandatory) is detected.
Page 363 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port) Maintenance Console Location 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.
Page 364 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Value Range En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling. The PBX recognises the end of dialling when (1) # is dialled, if programmed, (2) a pre-programmed telephone number is dialled, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires.
Page 365 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Maintenance Console Location 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Networking Data Transfer Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG-Slave or QSIG-Master.
Page 366 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode. Value Range INS: The port is in service.
Page 367 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Network The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Port Type Selects the port type. Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
Page 368 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port L1 Mode Selects the active mode of L1 (Layer 1) on the BRI port. Value Range Call, Permanent Maintenance Console Location 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY L2 Mode Selects the active mode of L2 (Layer 2) on the BRI port.
Page 369 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Maintenance Console Location 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY Network Numbering Plan The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 370 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Maintenance Console Location 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References 4.3.1 TIE Line Service 4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN) Calling Party number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public and private networks. Value Range Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private Maintenance Console Location...
Page 371 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Supplementary Service The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Port Type Selects the port type. Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
Page 372 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) 4.1.2.3 Advice of Charge (AOC) 4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P) 4.1.2.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN 4.1.2.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN 4.1.2.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) 4.3.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG 4.3.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG...
Page 373 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port CCBS Type Selects the type of the call from the network initiated by the CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber) feature, from which the specified number of digits are deleted. CCBS Delete Digits on this screen specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number. Value Range ALL, Unknown, International, National, Network specific, Subscriber, Abbreviated Maintenance Console Location...
Page 374: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property - Pri Port
9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Various settings can be programmed for each PRI port. Main The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 375 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Status Message Specifies whether the Status Message is sent to the network. Value Range No Transmission: Status Message is not sent. When error detection (Mandatory): Send the Status Message when an error (Mandatory) is detected. When error detection (Option / Mandatory): Send the Status Message when an error (Option or Mandatory) is detected.
Page 376 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Frame Sequence Selects the type of frame sequence for the port. This setting is only available when using the PRI23 card. Value Range Extended Multi frame (ESF), 4-Frame Multi frame (F4), 12-Frame Multi frame (F12) Maintenance Console Location 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port CO Setting...
Page 377 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Subscriber Number Specifies the number used as the CLIP number. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Ringback Tone to Outside Caller...
Page 378 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port ISDN Centrex Enables the use of the telephone company’s ISDN Centrex Service features. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Feature Guide References 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY Networking Data Transfer Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network.
Page 379 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Extension Setting Extension Setting parameters are applicable only for the PRI extension port. The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Port Type Selects the type of the port.
Page 380: Network Configuration
9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Feature Guide References 5.2.5.1 ISDN Extension Network Configuration The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Port Type Selects the port type.
Page 381 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Feature Guide References 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY Network Numbering Plan The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 382 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Value Range Public: Public network Private: Private Network VPN: Virtual Private Network Maintenance Console Location 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Feature Guide References 4.3.1 TIE Line Service 4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN) Calling Party Number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public and private networks.
Page 383 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Value Range Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber Maintenance Console Location 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Supplementary Service The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 384 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port The available services depend on the setting of Port Type on this screen. Value Range For COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911: No, Yes For 3PTY: No, Yes-3Pty Maintenance Console Location...
Page 385 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Feature Guide References 4.1.2.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) PC Programming Manual...
Page 386: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Legacy-Gw1/Legacy-Gw2
9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2 Settings for PBXs connected to the KX-NS1000 over a stacking connection can be programmed. Click Legacy-GW1 or Legacy-GW2 on the Slot screen to view the physical card shelf of the legacy gateway. Note •...
Page 387 For your reference, the following information is included on each Card Property screen for cards installed in legacy gateways: Site: The site number of the KX-NS1000 PBX to which the legacy gateway is connected. Shelf: The shelf number of the STACK-M card Legacy Gateway connection: •...
Page 388: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Legacy-Gw1/Legacy-Gw2-Card Property - Opb3
The following programming items are specific to when programming legacy gateways using Web Maintenance Console: Shelf Indicates the shelf position of the KX-NS1000 for the legacy gateway in which the OPB3 card is installed (reference only). Value Range 2: Legacy-GW1...
Page 389 9.29.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2—Card Property - OPB3 Maintenance Console Location 9.29.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2—Card Property - OPB3 PC Programming Manual...
Page 390: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Doorphone Card-Card Property
9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property The doorphone card’s settings can be programmed. The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Port Status Specifies the port’s status.
Page 391 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property Value Range 10 ´ n (n=1–255) s Maintenance Console Location 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property PC Programming Manual...
Page 392: Pbx Configuration-[1-2] Configuration-Portable Station
9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station Various portable station (PS) settings can be programmed. PS Registration and De-registration A PS must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and PS before it can be used. Programming instructions of the PBX are given below;...
Page 393 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station Click Close. Once the PS is successfully de-registered, the status of the PS will update to show "None". Personal Identification Number Specifies the Personal Identification Number (PIN) of the PBX, used to avoid registering a PS to the wrong PBX.
Page 394 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station Feature Guide References 5.2.4.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection 5.2.4.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station PC Programming Manual References 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—...
Page 395: Pbx Configuration-[1-3] Configuration-Option
9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option 9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option System options can be programmed. System Wireless—System ID Indicates the radio system ID used to register a PS (reference only). To clear the System ID Click the Clear Master CS button. A warning will be displayed. Confirm the contents of the warning, and then click Yes. Note The System ID can be cleared using this procedure only in Off-line mode.
Page 396 9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option Value Range ISDN Standard Mode: The CCBS, CF, CT, and Unified Messaging features are supported. DIL and DID call distribution are available for the D channel. T1-LCOT mode: DIL and DID call distribution are available for all 23B channels. The CCBS, CF, CT, and Unified Messaging features are not available in this mode.
Page 397: Pbx Configuration-[1-4] Configuration-Clock Priority
9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-4] Configuration—Clock Priority 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-4] Configuration—Clock Priority Shelf-Slot Number Selects and prioritises slot numbers for the BRI and PRI cards that are used to forward a clock pulse from an external source to the PBX. Obtain the master clock time from the outside line that the telephone company provides. To change Clock Priority, follow the steps below: Assign a Clock Priority to each slot.
Page 398: Pbx Configuration-[1-5] Configuration-Dsp Resource
9.34.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource IP communications that are handled by the PBX require DSP resources. DSP resources can be reserved for various functions of the PBX. The DSP resource advisor is a tool that analyses the configuration and user requirements for the system in order to recommend which DSP card(s) should be used.
Page 399 9.34.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting Feature Guide References 5.5.4 DSP Resource Usage Services—VoIP (G.711) Specifies the number of simultaneous VoIP calls to reserve DSP resources for. Value Range 0–506 VoIP calls Maintenance Console Location 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource Feature Guide References 5.5.4 DSP Resource Usage Services—Unified message Specifies the number of UM ports (including a fax port) to reserve DSP resources for.
Page 400 9.34.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting Value Range 0–64 ports Maintenance Console Location 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource Feature Guide References 5.5.4 DSP Resource Usage Services—Conference trunk Specifies the number of conference rooms to reserve DSP resources for. Value Range 0–24 conference rooms Maintenance Console Location 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource Feature Guide References...
Page 401 9.34.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting Value Range • Set: Specify a date and time to apply the changes, and click OK. The changes will be applied at the specified date and time. • Apply now: The changes are applied immediately. Click OK to apply the settings immediately. Maintenance Console Location 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource PC Programming Manual...
Page 402: Pbx Configuration-[1-5-1] Configuration-Dsp Resource-Setting-Dsp Resource Advisor
9.34.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting 9.34.1.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting—DSP Resource Advisor The DSP Resource Advisor assists programmers in the allocation of DSP resources to various PBX functions. Note the value of Total Power. This is the total capacity for allocating DSP resources, depending on the DSP cards installed in the PBX.
Page 403: Pbx Configuration-[1-5-2] Configuration-Dsp Resource-Usage
9.34.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage 9.34.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage The Usage screen is a graphical display of DSP resource usage. This information is useful to analyse usage patterns over time to determine DSP resource needs and optimal configuration settings. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 404 9.34.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage PC Programming Manual...
Page 405: Pbx Configuration-[2] System
Section 10 PBX Configuration—[2] System This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 406: Pbx Configuration-[2-1] System-Date & Time
10.1.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-1] System—Date & Time—Date & Time Setting 10.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1] System—Date & Time 10.1.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-1] System—Date & Time—Date & Time Setting The date and time of the PBX can be programmed. The date and time will be shown on the display of extensions (e.g., PT, PS).
Page 407: Pbx Configuration-[2-1-2] System-Date & Time-Sntp / Daylight Saving
10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Automatic clock adjustment and Summer time (daylight saving time) settings of the PBX can be programmed. Automatic clock adjustment can be performed using one of two methods, ISDN & Caller ID or SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol).
Page 408 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 (IP address), Max. 253 characters (host name) Maintenance Console Location 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Feature Guide References 5.5.5 Automatic Setup SNTP—SNTP Server—Port Number Indicates the port number used for communication with an SNTP server (reference only).
Page 409 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Maintenance Console Location 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Feature Guide References 5.5.5 Automatic Setup PC Programming Manual...
Page 410: Pbx Configuration-[2-1-2] System-Date & Time-Sntp / Daylight Saving-Daylight Saving
10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving 10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving Summer time can be programmed. Summer time sets the clock one hour forward at 2:00 AM on the start date, and one hour back at 2:00 AM on the end date. The start and end dates of a maximum of 20 different summer times can be programmed.
Page 411 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving End Date—Year, Month, Day Specifies the end date of daylight savings time. Value Range Year: 2000–2099 Month: 1–12 Day: 1–31 Maintenance Console Location 10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving PC Programming Manual References 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date &...
Page 412: Pbx Configuration-[2-2] System-Operator & Bgm
10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & Settings related to the PBX operator and audio sources can be specified. PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the extension number or floating extension number of incoming call distribution group to be designated as the PBX operator in each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
Page 413 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM Maintenance Console Location 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM Feature Guide References 2.13.4 Music on Hold BGM and Music on Hold—Sound on Transfer Selects the audio source for Music for Transfer (either the same music source chosen for the Music on Hold, or ringback tone).
Page 414: Pbx Configuration-[2-3] System-Timers & Counters
10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Various system timers and counters can be programmed. Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter Specifies the number of times Automatic Redial is attempted before being cancelled. Value Range 0–10 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 415 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 2.6.3 Last Number Redial Automatic Redial—Analogue CO Mute / Busy Detection Timer Specifies the length of time before the PBX stops muting the caller’s voice and cancels busy tone detection when Automatic Redial to analogue trunk is performed. Value Range 0–15 s Maintenance Console Location...
Page 416 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Dial—Extension Inter-digit Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits must be dialled before the PBX sends a reorder tone. Value Range 1–250 s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 2.5.2 Automatic Extension Release Dial—Analogue CO First Digit...
Page 417 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the length of time until an unanswered trunk call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each time mode.
Page 418 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.12.1 Call Transfer Recall—Call Park Recall Specifies the length of time that a parked call waits to be retrieved, before the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the extension that parked the call hears a Call Park Recall ring.
Page 419 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Tone Length—Busy Tone / DND Tone Specifies the length of time that a busy/DND tone is heard when a call is made to an extension in busy status or DND mode. A reorder tone will be sent when this timer expires. (For a call through DISA, the call will be disconnected when this timer expires.) Value Range 1–15 s...
Page 420 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf DISA—Delayed Answer Timer Specifies the length of time that the caller hears a ringback tone before hearing an OGM. Value Range 0–30 s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers &...
Page 421 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PC Programming Manual References 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant— Operator (Extension Number) Feature Guide References 2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA Specifies the length of time in which the caller must dial the second digit before the DISA AA Service activates.
Page 422 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept Specifies the length of time that an intercepted DISA call rings at the intercept routing destination before being disconnected. Value Range 0–60 s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PC Programming Manual References 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References...
Page 423 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PC Programming Manual References 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message Specifies the length of time that a progress tone is sent to the manager extension before recording an OGM. Value Range 0–60 s Maintenance Console Location...
Page 424 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Value Range 10 ´ n (n=1–15) s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PC Programming Manual References 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Feature Guide References 2.18.1 Doorphone Call Doorphone—Call Duration Specifies the length of time until an answered doorphone call is disconnected. Value Range 10 ´...
Page 425 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 2.18.2 Door Open Timed Reminder—Repeat Counter Specifies the number of times that an alarm is repeated. Value Range 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 2.24.4 Timed Reminder Timed Reminder—Interval Time Specifies the length of time between the repeated alarms.
Page 426 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Value Range 60 ´ n (n = 0–60) s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 2.14.2 Conference Unattended Conference—Warning Tone Start Timer Specifies the length of time until the parties involved in an Unattended Conference receive a warning tone after the conference originator receives the Unattended Conference Recall tone but does not return to the conference.
Page 427 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Value Range 0–15 s Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PC Programming Manual References 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display Specifies the length of time that a Caller ID number, with the Call Waiting tone offered by an analogue line from the telephone company, is shown on the display.
Page 428 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters 2.7.6 Verification Code Entry 2.24.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) External Sensor—Ring Duration Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the called party to answer before cancelling a sensor call. Value Range 10 ´...
Page 429 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PC Programming Manual References 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table Feature Guide References 4.3.1 TIE Line Service PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode Specifies the length of time that the current information remains on the display after the extension returns to idle status.
Page 430 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters During Conversation—DTMF Signal Length Specifies the length of time that a DTMF signal is sent when a number is dialled from a PT or PS during a conversation. Value Range 80 ms, 160 ms, 240 ms, 320 ms Maintenance Console Location 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers &...
Page 431 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PC Programming Manual References 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options— System Wireless—Out of Range Registration Feature Guide References 4.3.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group Conference Group Call—Ring Duration Specifies the length of time that a conference group call will ring. The conference group call will be established with members who answer within this time.
Page 432: Pbx Configuration-[2-4] System-Week Table
10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation depending on the time of day. The time mode can be switched either automatically or manually. Select the desired switching mode from the Time Service Switching Mode option.
Page 433 10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting Feature Guide References 5.1.3 Tenant Service 5.1.4 Time Service 2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Setting Enables the setting of the start time for each break period. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting Feature Guide References 5.1.3 Tenant Service 5.1.4 Time Service...
Page 434 10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting 5.1.4 Time Service PC Programming Manual...
Page 435: Pbx Configuration-[2-5] System-Holiday Table
10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation during holidays. Select the desired time mode from the Holiday Mode list. The start and end dates of a maximum of 24 different holidays can be programmed. You can click the UM Holiday Table link to open the Holiday Table used for features of the Unified Messaging system.
Page 436 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service Holiday Table—End Date—Month Specifies the month of the holiday end date. Value Range 1–12 Maintenance Console Location 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service Holiday Table—End Date—Day Specifies the day of the holiday end date.
Page 437: Pbx Configuration-[2-6] System-Numbering Plan
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main 10.6 PBX Configuration—[2-6] System—Numbering Plan 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Details of the extension numbering schemes, feature access numbers, and numbers to access other PBXs in a network can be programmed here. For more information on flexible numbering, see "5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature Guide.
Page 438 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main XX: 2 digits Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Features Feature numbers to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available while hearing a dial tone. Operator Call Specifies the feature number used to call the operator. Value Range Max.
Page 439: Trunk Group Access
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Trunk Group Access Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call using an idle trunk from a certain trunk group. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &...
Page 440: Doorphone Call
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial Feature Guide References 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System Personal Speed Dialling - Programming...
Page 441: Group Paging
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Group Paging Specifies the feature number used to page a certain paging group. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group Feature Guide References 2.17.1 Paging...
Page 442: Single Co Line Access
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager Feature Guide References 2.28.2 Outgoing Message (OGM) Single CO Line Access Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call using a certain trunk. Value Range Max.
Page 443: Directed Call Pickup
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group Feature Guide References 2.4.3 Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain extension. Value Range Max.
Page 444: Group Paging Answer
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Group Paging Answer Specifies the feature number used to answer a page to a paging group. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group Feature Guide References...
Page 445: Account Code Entry
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.7.5 Walking COS 2.7.6 Verification Code Entry Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Wireless XDP Parallel mode. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References...
Page 446 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.13.1 Call Hold Call Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Holding Extension Number Specifies the feature number used to retrieve a held call from a different extension by specifying a holding extension number. Value Range Max.
Page 447: Door Open
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Door Open Specifies the feature number used to open a door. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Feature Guide References 2.18.2 Door Open External Relay Access...
Page 448 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main ISDN Hold Specifies the feature number used to hold a call using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX feature. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References...
Page 449 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Page 450 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main ISDN-FWD (MSN) Set / Cancel / Confirm Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the FWD of incoming ISDN calls to an outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company (instead of the PBX), or confirm the FWD setting. Extension users can set the FWD destination to the network on an MSN basis.
Page 451 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming trunk calls. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND...
Page 452 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming trunk and intercom calls to an incoming call distribution group.
Page 453 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming intercom calls to an incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References...
Page 454: Walking Extension
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.17.1 Paging Walking Extension Specifies the feature number used to use the same extension settings at a new extension. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.24.3 Walking Extension Features...
Page 455: Automatic Call Waiting
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Automatic Call Waiting Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Call Waiting notification from a trunk, doorphone, or a call via an incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References...
Page 456: Incoming Call Queue Monitor
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out Log-in / Log-out Specifies the feature number used to join or leave an incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings...
Page 457 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start Feature Guide References 2.6.6 Hot Line Absent Message Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the display of an Absent Message.
Page 458 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.24.4 Timed Reminder Timed Reminder Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder. Value Range Max.
Page 459 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.7.3 Extension Dial Lock Time Service (Day / Lunch / Break / Night) Switch Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to change the time mode manually.
Page 460: Extension Feature Clear
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Remote Extension Dial Lock On Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to lock other extensions using the Extension Dial Lock feature. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References...
Page 461 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Dial Information (CTI) Specifies the feature number used to send dial information to the CTI feature instead of the PBX. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Conference Group Call Operation...
Page 462: Busy Out Cancel
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Busy Out Cancel Specifies the feature number used to cancel the Busy Out status of an analogue trunk. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References...
Page 463 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Note • This tab is for programming extensions connected to legacy gateway PBXs. For information about setting up a legacy gateway PBX, see 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2. • For further information about programming for KX-T7710 phones, refer to the documentation of the connected legacy gateway PBX.
Page 464 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual...
Page 465: Pbx Configuration-[2-6-2] System-Numbering Plan-Quick Dial
10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial Quick Dialling numbers are used to call extensions or outside parties, or access certain features without having to dial their full numbers. It is possible to register Quick Dialling numbers that overlap with other registered numbers (refer to "Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public Trunks"...
Page 466: Pbx Configuration-[2-6-3] System-Numbering Plan-B/Na Dnd Call Feature
10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/ NA DND Call Feature Feature numbers used to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available while hearing a busy, DND, or ringback tone. Each feature must have a unique feature number. For more information on flexible numbering, see "5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering"...
Page 467 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny Feature Guide References 2.10.2 Executive Busy Override Alternate Calling - Ring / Voice Specifies the feature number used to allow a caller to change the called extension’s preset call receiving method to ring tone or voice.
Page 468: Automatic Callback Busy
10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny Feature Guide References 2.10.3 Call Monitor Automatic Callback Busy Specifies the feature number used to reserve a busy line and receive callback ringing when the line becomes idle.
Page 469: Pbx Configuration-[2-7] System-Class Of Service
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings 10.7 PBX Configuration—[2-7] System—Class of Service 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Each extension, doorphone port, incoming call distribution group, and trunk group is assigned a Class of Service (COS). Certain features can be programmed to behave differently depending on the COS. A maximum of 64 COS levels can be programmed.
Page 470 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone— 15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code 15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code Feature Guide References 2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) TRS Level on Extension Lock Specifies the TRS/Barring level for making trunk calls when an extension is locked using the Extension Dial Lock feature.
Page 471 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous— TRS Override by System Speed Dialling Feature Guide References 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System 2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) CO & SMDR COS Name Specifies the name of the COS.
Page 472: Transfer To Co
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Transfer to CO Enables the transferring of calls to trunks. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—...
Page 473 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 2.5.4.3 Account Code Entry CF (MSN) Enables forwarding of ISDN calls to an outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX, on an MSN basis.
Page 474: Dnd Override
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS) Call Pickup by DSS Enables using a DSS button to pick up a call to a specified extension. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 475 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) OHCA / Whisper OHCA Enables using OHCA/Whisper OHCA as a method of second call notification by entering the feature number. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—...
Page 476: Executive Busy Override
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Enable: The call will be automatically answered. Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 2.4.4 Hands-free Answerback Executive COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Value Range Max.
Page 477: Executive Busy Override Deny
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 2.10.2 Executive Busy Override Executive Busy Override Deny Enables preventing other extensions from interrupting calls.
Page 478 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS) Group Forward Set Enables setting call forwarding for calls to an incoming call distribution group. Value Range Disable: An extension cannot set call forwarding for any group. Enable-All: An extension can set call forwarding for all groups.
Page 479 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 5.1.6 Manager Features Time Service Switch Enables manual switching of time modes.
Page 480 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS) SDN Key Mode Selects what happens when an extension user presses an SDN button while on hook. Value Range Enhanced DSS: The registered (owner) extension is called.
Page 481: Door Unlock
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension Optional Device & Other Extensions COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Value Range Max.
Page 482 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay Feature Guide References 2.18.4 External Relay Control Accept the Call from DISA Enables reception of calls from DISA. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 483 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS Allows Wireless XDP Parallel Mode to be set by a PS. Value Range Allow, Deny Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—...
Page 484 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant) CA ICD Group Log Out Enables logging out of ICD groups when using Communication Assistant (CA) Client. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CA—...
Page 485 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Conference Group Call—Ring Duration 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Conference Group Call Operation 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group Feature Guide References 2.15.1 Conference Group Call Accept a collect call (for Brazil) Enables accepting collect calls.
Page 486: Pbx Configuration-[2-7-2] System-Class Of Service-External Call Block
10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block Each COS can have different trunk groups available for making trunk calls, depending on the time mode (day/ lunch/break/night). Select the desired time mode from the list. Outgoing Trunk Group 1–96 Specifies the available trunk groups.
Page 487: Pbx Configuration-[2-7-3] System-Class Of Service-Internal Call Block
10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block Internal Call Block determines the restrictions placed on making intercom calls. The extensions, incoming call distribution groups, and doorphones belonging to a certain COS can be programmed to not receive intercom calls from those belonging to a certain COS.
Page 488: Pbx Configuration-[2-8] System-Ring Tone Patterns
10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO 10.8 PBX Configuration—[2-8] System—Ring Tone Patterns 10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming trunk calls depending on the trunk group that the calls are received on.
Page 489: Pbx Configuration-[2-8-2] System-Ring Tone Patterns-Call From Doorphone
10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE 10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming doorphone calls depending on the doorphone port that the calls originate from. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
Page 490: Pbx Configuration-[2-8-3] System-Ring Tone Patterns-Call From Others
10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming intercom calls and ringing triggered by certain PBX features (Timed Reminder, Call Back, and Live Call Screening). A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
Page 491 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Maintenance Console Location 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table Live Call Screening—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8...
Page 492: Pbx Configuration-[2-9] System-System Options
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Various system settings can be programmed. Option 1 PT LCD—Date Display Selects the order that the month and date are shown on the displays of extensions. Value Range Date-Month, Month-Date Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PT LCD—Time Display...
Page 493 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED Selects the light pattern of the FWD/DND button while the FWD feature is activated. Value Range On (Solid): Red on Flash: Slow red flashing Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND...
Page 494 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options FWD/DND Cycle Switch: Switch the FWD on/DND on/Off mode instead of entering the programming mode for the FWD/DND setting. (When there are separate FWD/DND settings for calls from trunks and calls from extensions, mode switching cannot be performed.) Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PC Programming Manual References...
Page 495 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.11.2 Off-hook Monitor PT Operation—Privacy Release by SCO key Selects the function of the S-CO button during a trunk call. Value Range Enable: Pressing the S-CO button activates the Privacy Release feature Disable: Pressing the S-CO button switches the information shown on the PT display.
Page 496 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range No Ring, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.4.4 Hands-free Answerback PT Operation—Automatic Hold by ICM / CO / ICD Group Key Selects whether calls are disconnected or held when an INTERCOM, PDN, CO, or ICD Group button is pressed while having a conversation.
Page 497 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Option 2 Extension Clear—Call Waiting Specifies whether the Call Waiting setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed. Value Range Clear, Do not clear Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear Extension Clear—Fwd/DND Specifies whether the FWD/DND setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed.
Page 498 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options CODEC—Network CODEC Selects the codec type for ISDN lines. Value Range A-Law, Mu-Law Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode Specifies whether to automatically send "#"...
Page 499 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.6.3 Last Number Redial Redial—Automatic Redial for Analogue CO Selects whether Automatic Redial to an analogue trunk is performed when the called party does not answer within a pre-programmed time period. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options...
Page 500 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.6.3 Last Number Redial Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call Selects whether the time limit for extension-to-trunk calls applies to outgoing calls only or for both outgoing and incoming calls. COS determines the use of this feature, and the length of the time limit can be assigned on a trunk group basis.
Page 501 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.18.1 Doorphone Call 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 2. Confirmation Tone 2 is heard from a PT when it receives a call in Hands-free Answerback mode, or paging.
Page 502 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4-1. Confirmation Tone 4-1 is heard from an extension when a new party joins a conference call.
Page 503 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone Enables the PBX to send dial tones at different frequencies depending on the setting of the extension. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 504 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PC Programming Manual References 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting Feature Guide References 2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 2.25.1 Dial Tone Echo Cancel—Conference...
Page 505 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Echo Cancel—Extension to Digital Line Enables the use of echo cancelling for extension-to-ISDN line calls. If set to "Enable", echo cancelling is used for extension-to-ISDN line calls. If set to "Disable", echo cancelling is not used for extension-to-ISDN line calls. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 506 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options To enable this setting, DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call on this screen must be set to "ON or Flash". Value Range Disable: The DSS button will light up when a call arrives, but pressing it will not pick up the call. Enable: The DSS button will flash when a call arrives, and pressing it will pick up the call.
Page 507 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Private Network—Public Call through Private Network—Minimum Public Caller ID Digits Specifies the minimum length of Caller ID required for a call from a private network to be considered as a call from a public network. Value Range 0–15 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 508 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO Selects whether the CLIP number of the calling party or the CLIP number of the forwarding extension or virtual PS is sent to the forwarding destination to identify the origin of a trunk call.
Page 509 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PC Programming Manual References 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters— System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer Feature Guide References 4.3.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD Selects whether call information (such as Caller ID) is shown on the display of a PDN extension PS (i.e., a PS with one or more PDN buttons) when a call is received while delayed ringing is set.
Page 510 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.20.1 Message Waiting Whisper OHCA—for SLT Enables the use of Whisper OHCA to SLTs and IP-PTs Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.10.4.4 Whisper OHCA Call Waiting—Automatic Call Waiting for Extension Call...
Page 511 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out ISDN Voice Path Connection—Connect when "Alert" is sent from ISDN Enables the voice path of an ISDN line to connect even when an "Alert" signal is received from the telephone company.
Page 512 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options ISDN Option—Calling Party Name Sending Format Specifies the sending format of the calling party name when making a call to the ISDN network. Value Range Display, Facility Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Option 6 (CTI) Built-in Communication Assistant—System status retry interval timer Specifies the length of time until the alive check is retried when no response is received, for First Party Call...
Page 513 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) 3rd Party CTI—System status retry counter Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI. When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number of times without success, the PBX assumes that the logical connection with the CTI application software has been lost.
Page 514 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) CTI Make Call—SLT Ring Specifies whether to ring an SLT when a call is made from CTI, instead of the SLT. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options CTI Hold—Forced Idle when Hold by PDN/SDN Key Selects whether to force an extension to become idle while having a call held on a PDN/SDN button.
Page 515 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection PC Programming Manual...
Page 516: Pbx Configuration-[2-10] System-Extension Cid Settings
10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Various settings for extension Caller ID can be programmed. Extension Caller ID Modulation Type Specifies the modulation frequency to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT. Value Range V.23(ETSI), Bell202(Bellcore) Maintenance Console Location...
Page 517: Caller Id Signal Type
10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Channel Seizure Wait Time Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to send the seizure signal following the first ring when sending Caller ID information to an SLT. Value Range 64 ´...
Page 518 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Send Caller ID Name to Extension Enables the PBX to send the caller’s name when sending Caller ID information to an SLT. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 519 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Maintenance Console Location 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID PC Programming Manual...
Page 520: Pbx Configuration-[2-11] System-Audio Gain
10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH 10.11 PBX Configuration—[2-11] System—Audio Gain 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Gain levels for the External Pager/External BGM ports can be programmed. Paging—EPG 1 (External Pager 1) Specifies the paging volume for External Pager port 1. Value Range -15.5–15.5 dB Maintenance Console Location...
Page 521 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Value Range -31.5–31.5 dB Maintenance Console Location 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH PC Programming Manual References 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM Feature Guide References 2.13.4 Music on Hold 2.28.1 Background Music (BGM) Internal MOH—MOH 1–8 (Music on Hold 1–8) Specifies the music volume for each internal BGM (MOH 1–8).
Page 522: Pbx Configuration-[2-11-2] System-Audio Gain-Card
10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card 10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card Gain levels can be programmed for each type of card. Up Gain (To PBX) Specifies the volume for audio signals from the selected type of card to the PBX. Value Range -31.5–31.5 dB Maintenance Console Location 10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card...
Page 523: Pbx Configuration-[3] Group
Section 11 PBX Configuration—[3] Group This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Group menu of the PBX Configuration Menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 524: Pbx Configuration-[3-1] Group-Trunk Group
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings 11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1] Group—Trunk Group 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Trunks can be organised into trunk groups. The settings of a trunk group are applied to all trunks in the group. A maximum of 96 trunk groups can be programmed. For more information on trunk groups, see "5.1.2 Group"...
Page 525: Line Hunting Order
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Line Hunting Order Specifies the trunk hunting sequence for the trunk group. The hunting sequence can be programmed to start from the lowest or highest numbered trunks, or to rotate uniformly among all trunks. Value Range High ->...
Page 526 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation Caller ID Modification Table Specifies the table to be used for modifying caller information (telephone number).
Page 527 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Maintenance Console Location 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings PC Programming Manual References 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings DISA Tone Detection—Silence Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated trunk-to-trunk call by silence detection. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 528: Host Pbx Access Code
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings PC Programming Manual References 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Host PBX Access Code Group Name...
Page 529 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Collect Call Reject (for Brazil) Group Name Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings PC Programming Manual References 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &...
Page 530: Pbx Configuration-[3-1-2] Group-Trunk Group-Local Access Priority
11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority Trunk groups can be assigned a priority for Idle Line Access. When making a trunk call by Idle Line Access, the PBX will search trunk groups for an idle trunk according to the priority assigned here. Trunk Group No.
Page 531: Pbx Configuration-[3-1-3] Group-Trunk Group-Caller Id Modification
11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification The telephone numbers of incoming callers can be modified automatically according to pre-programmed modification tables, and then recorded for calling back. Leading Digits After the caller’s number is modified by the Length of Digits Modification Tables or CLIP Modification Tables, the PBX checks the leading digits of the modified number for an area code programmed in the Caller ID Modification Table assigned to that trunk group.
Page 532 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the incoming caller’s number in the place of the removed digits. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification PC Programming Manual References...
Page 533 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National) Specifies the minimum number of digits required in the caller’s number for it to be recognised as a national call. The value specified here must be smaller than Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International).
Page 534 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification Added Number (for National) Specifies the number to be added to the incoming telephone number when the total number of digits exceeds Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National) but does not exceed Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International).
Page 535 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the incoming caller’s number in the place of the removed digits for each type of network numbering plan. Value Range Max.
Page 536: Pbx Configuration-[3-1-4] Group-Trunk Group-Dialling Plan
11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after an extension user completes dialling. The PBX can recognise the end of dialling when the dialled telephone number starts with the programmed leading number and contains the programmed total number of digits.
Page 537 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the number dialled by en-bloc dialling in the place of the removed digits. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan Feature Guide References 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY...
Page 538: Pbx Configuration-[3-1-4] Group-Trunk Group-Dialling Plan-Auto Assign
11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan 11.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan—Auto Assign It is possible to assign a set of leading numbers automatically. Select Auto Assigning Table Selects the set of preset leading number values to assign to the active dialling plan table. When Type D is selected, you will be prompted to enter a 3-digit area code, and 7 "X"s, in cells 1 through 47 of the dialling plan table.
Page 539: Pbx Configuration-[3-1-5] Group-Trunk Group-Charge Rate
11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate 11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate The rate charged per pay tone signal (sent from the telephone company) can be assigned for each trunk group. Trunk Group Name Indicates the name of the trunk group (reference only). Value Range Max.
Page 540: Pbx Configuration-[3-2] Group-User Group
11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group 11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group Extensions can be assigned to a tenant according to their extension user groups. An extension user group can belong to only one tenant. However, one extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups and several paging groups.
Page 541: Pbx Configuration-[3-3] Group-Call Pickup Group
11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group 11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group can belong to up to 8 call pickup groups. A maximum of 96 call pickup groups can be programmed. To assign extension user groups to call pickup groups easily, click All Setting.
Page 542: Pbx Configuration-[3-3] Group-Call Pickup Group-All Setting
11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting 11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group can belong to multiple call pickup groups. Call Pickup Group Name Specifies the name of the call pickup group.
Page 543: Pbx Configuration-[3-4] Group-Paging Group
11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. External pagers can also be assigned to a paging group. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups.
Page 544 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group 5.1.2 Group PC Programming Manual...
Page 545: Pbx Configuration-[3-4] Group-Paging Group-All Setting
11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—All Setting 11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—All Setting Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups. Paging Group Name Specifies the name of the paging group.
Page 546: Pbx Configuration-[3-4] Group-Paging Group-External
11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—External Pager 11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—External Pager External pagers can be assigned to a paging group. One external pager can belong to multiple paging groups. Paging Group Name Indicates the name of the paging group (reference only). Value Range Max.
Page 547: Pbx Configuration-[3-5] Group-Incoming Call Distribution Group
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings 11.5 PBX Configuration—[3-5] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Extensions can be assigned as members of an incoming call distribution group. Calls to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to its member extensions as programmed.
Page 548 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution Call Waiting Distribution Selects the call waiting distribution method for busy extensions of the incoming call distribution group. Value Range All, Distribution Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution...
Page 549 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution Tenant Number Specifies the tenant to which the incoming call distribution group belongs, to determine the Time Table and the audio source for the group.
Page 550: Overflow Queuing Busy
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block CLIP on ICD Group Button Specifies the CLIP number sent to the network when making calls using the ICD Group button. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References...
Page 551: Overflow No Answer
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings PC Programming Manual References 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table Feature Guide References 2.2.2.6 Overflow Feature Queuing Busy—Queue Call Capacity Specifies the number of calls that can wait in a queue. Value Range None, 1–30 Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings...
Page 552 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings PC Programming Manual References 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table Feature Guide References 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature 2.2.2.6 Overflow Feature...
Page 553: Queuing Time Table
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature Queuing Time Table Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.
Page 554: Extension No Answer Redirection Time
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Value Range Disable (Ringback Tone), Enable Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Miscellaneous Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max.
Page 555 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out Specifies the number of consecutive unanswered calls before a member extension is automatically logged out from the incoming call distribution group. Value Range None, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References...
Page 556 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.2.5 VIP Call Supervisor Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the incoming call distribution group’s supervisor. The supervisor can monitor and control the status of each member of the group using a 6-line display PT.
Page 557 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Incoming Call Log Memory Specifies the number of unanswered calls to the incoming call distribution group that can be logged in the call log memory.
Page 558 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) Group FWD Call from Extension—Setting Indicates the current FWD status for incoming intercom calls (reference only). Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location...
Page 559: Pbx Configuration-[3-5-1] Group-Incoming Call Distribution Group-Group Settings-Member List
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List Each incoming call distribution group can have a maximum of 128 members (extensions) assigned to it, and each member can have its own delayed ringing and Wrap-up time settings. An extension can be a member of multiple incoming call distribution groups.
Page 560: Delayed Ring
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Delayed Ring Specifies the delayed ringing setting of each member. (Applicable when the call distribution method of the incoming call distribution group is set to Ring.) Value Range Immediate, 1–6 Rings, No Ring Maintenance Console Location 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List...
Page 561: Pbx Configuration-[3-5-2] Group-Incoming Call Distribution Group-Queuing Time Table
11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table 11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table A Queuing Time Table can contain up to 16 sequences which control how calls waiting in a queue are handled. A maximum of 128 Queuing Time Tables can be programmed. Queuing Sequence—Sequence 01–16 Specifies the command activated by the corresponding sequence.
Page 562: Pbx Configuration-[3-5-3] Group-Incoming Call Distribution Group-Miscellaneous
11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Optional settings related to Incoming Call Distribution Groups can be programmed. Options—Call Log to ICD Group for Answered Call Selects whether answered calls to an ICD Group are also logged in the Incoming Call Log for the group, in addition to the log of the extension that answered the call.
Page 563 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Maintenance Console Location 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Feature Guide References 2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution Options—Wrap-up Timer based on Selects whether the ICD Group member wrap-up timer or extension wrap-up timer is used. If Extension is selected here, Wrap-up Timer on 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List becomes unavailable.
Page 564: Pbx Configuration-[3-6] Group-Extension Hunting Group
11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group 11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group If an extension within an idle extension hunting group is called when it is busy or in DND mode, the call can be redirected to another extension in the same hunting group, according to a pre-programmed hunting type. If there is no idle extension in the group, the call can then be redirected to the overflow destination, which can be different depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
Page 565 11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group Maintenance Console Location 11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting PC Programming Manual...
Page 566: Pbx Configuration-[3-6] Group-Extension Hunting Group-Member List
11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List 11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List Each hunting group can contain up to 16 extensions. Select the hunting group to programme from the Hunting Group No. list. To assign members to the group, enter the extension numbers in Extension Number or click Extension No.
Page 567: Pbx Configuration-[3-7] Group-Um Group
11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings 11.7 PBX Configuration—[3-7] Group—UM Group 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings The Unified Messaging (UM) ports of a PBX make up a group, called a UM group. This group has a floating extension number, which can be the destination for incoming calls, redirected calls, transferred calls, etc. When a call is received at the UM group, the Unified Messaging system can direct the caller to leave a voice message or dial a number to reach the desired party.
Page 568 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Feature Guide References 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview—UM Ports and the UM Group Transfer Recall to Mailbox Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the transfer destination extension to the Unified Messaging system in these situations: (1) when a call is transferred to an extension by the Call Transfer without Announcement feature using the Automated Attendant (AA) service of the Unified Messaging system, and the...
Page 569: Pbx Configuration-[3-7-2] Group-Um Group-Unit Settings
11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings A UM group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. In a One-look network, each PBX has its own UM group, and each group has its own floating extension number.
Page 570 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings Value Range Site Name Maintenance Console Location 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings Fail Over Site Name Specifies the Site number and Site name of the PBX to be used for UM Group Failover. During a PBX operation failure, incoming calls routed to the UM group of the offline PBX will be automatically redirected to the specified PBX’s UM group.
Page 571: Pbx Configuration-[3-7-2] Group-Um Group-Unit Settings-Member List
11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings 11.7.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings—Member List Displays information about all UM ports that belong to the selected UM group. Indicates the UM port number (reference only). Value Range 1–24 Maintenance Console Location 11.7.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings—Member List PC Programming Manual References 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings Extension No.
Page 572 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings PC Programming Manual References 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings Feature Guide References 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview—UM Ports and the UM Group PC Programming Manual...
Page 573: Pbx Configuration-[3-8] Group-Ps Ring Group
11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions that receives incoming calls. Each group has a floating extension number and name. One PS can belong to multiple PS ring groups. A maximum of 32 PS ring groups can be programmed, each containing up to 512 PS extensions.
Page 574 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group Feature Guide References 5.2.4.2 PS Ring Group PC Programming Manual...
Page 575: Pbx Configuration-[3-8] Group-Ps Ring Group-Member List
11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Member List 11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Member List Each PS Ring Group can have up to 512 PS extensions assigned. Select the group to programme from the PS Ring Group Number list. To assign members to the PS Ring Group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number Setting).
Page 576: Pbx Configuration-[3-9] Group-Conference Group
11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group A conference group is a group of telephones (extensions or outside destinations) that ring when a conference group call is made. One destination number can be assigned to multiple conference groups. Up to 31 members can be assigned to each of 8 conference groups.
Page 577 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group Maintenance Console Location 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group PC Programming Manual References 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group— Broadcast Mode Feature Guide References 2.15.1 Conference Group Call PC Programming Manual...
Page 578: Pbx Configuration-[3-9] Group-Conference Group-Member List
11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Member List 11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Member List Up to 31 members can be assigned to each conference group. Select the group to programme from the Conference Group No. list. When Broadcast Mode is set to "Disable", only up to 7 members can be assigned to a group. All of these members are automatically allowed to speak when the call starts.
Page 579: Pbx Configuration-[3-10] Group-P2P Group
11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group 11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group Settings for peer-to-peer (P2P) groups can be programmed. P2P Group Name Specifies the name of the P2P group. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection Bandwidth Control...
Page 580: Pbx Configuration-[3-11] Group-Vm(Dpt) Group
11.11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-1] Group—VM(DPT) Group—System Settings A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DPT Integration can be connected to DPT ports of KX-TDE/KX-NCP/KX-TDA PBXs. The DPT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DPT) Group. Settings for these groups can be programmed.
Page 581: Pbx Configuration-[3-11-2] Group-Vm(Dpt) Group-Unit Settings
11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings A VM (DPT) group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign members to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.5 Tool—Extension List View).
Page 582: Pbx Configuration-[3-11-2] Group-Vm(Dpt) Group-Unit Settings-Member List
11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings 11.11.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List Displays information on the settings of all relevant ports. Only ports set to VM(DPT) for DPT Type—Type in the extension’s Port Property screen will be displayed. For details, see To access port properties in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 583: Pbx Configuration-[3-12] Group-Vm(Dtmf) Group
11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DTMF Integration can be connected to SLT ports of KX-TDE/KX-NCP/KX-TDA PBXs. The SLT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DTMF) Group. Settings for these groups can be programmed.
Page 584: Pbx Configuration-[3-12-2] Group-Vm(Dtmf) Group-Group Settings
11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings 11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings A VM (DTMF) group has a floating extension number, and can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign members to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.5 Tool—Extension List View).
Page 585: Pbx Configuration-[3-12-2] Group-Vm(Dtmf) Group-Group Settings-Member List
11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings 11.12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List Select the group to programme from the VM(DTMF) Group Number list. To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number Setting).
Page 586 11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings PC Programming Manual...
Page 587: Pbx Configuration-[4] Extension
Section 12 PBX Configuration—[4] Extension This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Extension menu of the PBX Configuration Menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 588: Pbx Configuration-[4-1] Extension-Wired Extension
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings 12.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1] Extension—Wired Extension 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings For each slot in which an extension card is installed, a certain number of extension ports are displayed. For each extension port, various extension settings can be assigned. To search for a specific extension, enter the extension number or the extension name in the search box and click Find Next.
Page 589 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings DPT(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of DPT port (DLC) ISDN: ISDN port (BRI/PRI) OPX: T1-OPX port (T1) IP-EXT: IP-Extension port (V-IPEXT) SIP: General SIP Extension port (V-SIPEXT) SIP-MLT: KX-UT series SIP phone/S-PS/SIP-CS Extension port (V-UTEXT) UM: Unified Messaging System Extension port Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings...
Page 590 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 5.1.2 Group 5.1.3 Tenant Service Specifies the COS of the extension. Value Range 1–64 Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS) Extension PIN...
Page 591 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing–No Answer and...
Page 592 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing Intercept No Answer Time Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name...
Page 593 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings CLIP Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max.
Page 594 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— Subscriber Number 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Subscriber Number 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP— CLIP ID Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) CLIR...
Page 595 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Two-way Recording Specifies whether to enable the two-way recording feature for the extension using the Unified Messaging system.
Page 596 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Wireless XDP Specifies the extension number of the PS with which Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is established. To enable Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, the PS must be turned off once and then turned on after assigning this setting. Note S-PSs cannot be used with this setting.
Page 597 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Transfer Recall Destination Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user transfers a call with the Call Transfer without Announcement feature and the transferred call is not answered within a certain time period. Value Range Max.
Page 598 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions. Value Range Off: No notification BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker...
Page 599 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start Feature Guide References 2.6.6 Hot Line Pickup Dial No.
Page 600 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Call Pickup Deny Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions.
Page 601 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 16 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.20.2 Absent Message Charge Limit Specifies the maximum limit of call charges allowed for the extension. When this limit is reached, the extension cannot be used to make further trunk calls.
Page 602 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Option 4 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max.
Page 603 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range No Line: No line is selected. Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call. Ringing Line: The longest ringing call is selected. PDN: The call arriving at any PDN button is selected. F-1–F-84: The call arriving at a flexible button (F-1–F-84) is selected.
Page 604 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings LCS Answer Mode Specifies whether the extension’s mailbox is monitored in Hands-free or Private mode. Value Range Hands free: Monitor through the built-in speaker Private: Monitor through the handset or the built-in speaker after hearing a warning tone Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References...
Page 605 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.21.4 Display Information Incoming Call Display Selects which caller information is shown on the first line of the extension’s display. Value Range Caller ID Name, CO Line Name, DDI/DID Name Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.21.4 Display Information...
Page 606 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.4.4 Hands-free Answerback Option 6 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name...
Page 607: Paging Deny
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Flexible Button Programming Mode Specifies whether the extension user can modify all flexible buttons without limitation, or only the One-touch Dialling buttons. When the mode is set to One-touch Dial, there is no need to enter "2" before the number when customising a One-touch Dialling button.
Page 608 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.17.1 Paging Option 7 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension.
Page 609 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate 2.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA) Incoming Call Log Memory Specifies the number of incoming trunk calls that are retained in the extension’s Incoming Call Log memory. Value Range 0–100 Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References...
Page 610 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Option 8 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max.
Page 611 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID Specifies the length of time that the ringing for a call is delayed when the call follows immediately after the previous unanswered call. When receiving two calls in quick succession (e.g., when a call waiting in a queue is directed to an extension immediately after the previous unanswered call stops ringing), some SLTs require a pause, after the first call stops ringing, to receive the second call’s Caller ID information.
Page 612 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings PDN Delayed Ringing Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons).
Page 613 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Mobile Extension Specifies whether to enable or disable mobile extension features (with a cellular phone or other outside destination) for the extension. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.27.1 Cellular Phone Features—SUMMARY FWD / DND...
Page 614 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) FWD Destination for Call from CO Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls (reference only). Value Range Max.
Page 615 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings FWD Destination for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls (reference only). Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND...
Page 616 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) PC Programming Manual...
Page 617: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-1] Extension-Wired Extension-Extension Settings-Clip Generate
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings 12.1.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten. If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded. Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext.
Page 618 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range 0–5 Maintenance Console Location 12.1.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Parameter—Head of ID Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.
Page 619 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) PC Programming Manual...
Page 620: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-2] Extension-Wired Extension-Fwd/Dnd
12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND For each extension, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. To copy the FWD/DND settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to.
Page 621: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-3] Extension-Wired Extension-Speed Dial
12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial Personal Speed Dialling allows extension users to dial frequently dialled numbers using two-digit speed dialling numbers (00–99). A maximum of 100 Personal Speed Dialling numbers can be programmed for each extension.
Page 622: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-4] Extension-Wired Extension-Flexible Button
12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Each flexible button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 84 flexible buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
Page 623 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection (for Group CO) Specifies the trunk group to be accessed. Value Range 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
Page 624 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out Parameter Selection (for Time Service) Selects which time modes are switched manually. Value Range All (Day/Night/Lunch/Break), Day/Night/Break, Day/Night/Lunch, Day/Night Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change) Specifies the TRS/Barring level to be used temporarily on a certain extension.
Page 625 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Parameter Selection (for SDN) Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button. Value Range Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension...
Page 626 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and trunk calls are forwarded. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References...
Page 627 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Extension Number (for Call Log) Specifies the extension’s own number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which call log information is displayed. If the cell is left empty, the extension will display its own call log information.
Page 628 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer) Specifies the floating extension number of the UM group containing the desired mailbox. Value Range Max.
Page 629 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension, when an extension number is specified (reference only). Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Dial (for One-touch) Specifies the number to be dialled.
Page 630 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Label Name Specifies the name of each flexible button for KX-NT366 and KX-NT560 IP-PTs, and KX-UT248 and KX-UT670 SIP-MLTs.
Page 631 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Value Range IP-PT (except KX-NT265/KX-NT321): 1–30 KX-NT265/KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 1 is heard.) S-PS: Not available. Other telephones: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 2 is heard.) Maintenance Console Location 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
Page 632: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-4] Extension-Wired Extension-Flexible Button-Flexible Button Data Copy
12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button 12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy The flexible button settings (including key label settings) of an extension can be copied to different extensions. Destination Extension Line Select the number and name of the extension that will receive the copied settings. Multiple extensions can be selected.
Page 633: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-5] Extension-Wired Extension-Pf Button
12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button 12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button Each Programmable Feature (PF) button can be customised to access a certain feature with one touch. A maximum of 12 PF buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
Page 634: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-6] Extension-Wired Extension-Ndss Link Data - Send
12.1.6 PBX Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send 12.1.6 PBX Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 635: Pbx Configuration-[4-2] Extension-Portable Station
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings 12.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2] Extension—Portable Station 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings For each Portable Station (PS), various extension settings can be assigned. A maximum of 512 PSs can be programmed. To copy the settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to. The copied data includes FWD/DND and flexible button settings.
Page 636 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Portable Station Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings User Group Specifies the extension user group to which the PS belongs. The extension user group is used to compose tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups. Value Range 1–96 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 637 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend: Keeping PINs secret. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed. Changing PINs frequently. Value Range Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References...
Page 638 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing–No Answer and Intercept Routing–DND. Note that Intercept Routing–Busy calls are routed using Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy below.
Page 639 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No. Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station—...
Page 640 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No. Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station—...
Page 641 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Subscriber Number 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP— CLIP ID Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) CLIR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a public network trunk call.
Page 642 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Two-way Recording Specifies whether to enable the two-way recording feature for the PS using the Unified Messaging system. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 643 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name Ring Pattern Table Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the PS. Value Range 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO 10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE...
Page 644 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings ARS Itemised Code Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying the calls made from the PS for accounting and billing purposes. Value Range Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References...
Page 645 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions. Value Range Off: No notification BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker OHCA: If selected, a BSS notification will be received. W-OHCA: If selected, a BSS notification will be received.
Page 646 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.6.6 Hot Line Pickup Dial No. Specifies the number to be dialled automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References...
Page 647 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Call Pickup Deny Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions. Value Range Disable: Allows other extension users to pick up calls to your PS Enable: Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your PS Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References...
Page 648 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point in 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge. Value Range 0–9999999 Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel &...
Page 649 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Outgoing Preferred Line Selects the line to be seized after going off-hook to make a call. Value Range No Line: No line is seized. Idle: An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups. ICM/PDN: An extension line is seized, or, for a PDN extension, an idle PDN button is selected.
Page 650 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2 Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone LCS Recording Mode Specifies whether to continue or stop recording the message in the PS’s mailbox when the PS user answers a call that was being monitored.
Page 651 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name Display Language Selects the display language of the PS. Value Range Language1–Language5 Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.21.4 Display Information...
Page 652 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Option 6 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station—...
Page 653 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Option 7 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station—...
Page 654 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate 2.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA) Incoming Call Log Memory Specifies the number of incoming trunk calls that are retained in the PS’s Incoming Call Log memory. Value Range 0–100 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 655 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY Option 8 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station—...
Page 656 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings This timer is used when " Options—Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to "Extension" in 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous. Value Range 0–3000 s Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List—...
Page 657 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PDN Delayed Ringing Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons). Value Range Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References...
Page 658 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings FWD / DND Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each PS can be referred. FWD and DND settings can be programmed separately for each PS in 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND.
Page 659 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) FWD Destination for Call from CO Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls (reference only). Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References...
Page 660 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) FWD No Answer Time Specifies the length of time that an incoming call rings at the PS before the call is forwarded. Value Range 0–120 s Maintenance Console Location...
Page 661: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-1] Extension-Portable Station-Extension Settings-Clip Generate
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings 12.2.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten. If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded. Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext.
Page 662 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range 0–4 Maintenance Console Location 12.2.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate PC Programming Manual References 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Parameter—Head of ID Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.
Page 663 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) PC Programming Manual...
Page 664: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-2] Extension-Portable Station-Fwd/Dnd
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND For each PS, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list. To copy FWD/DND values from one location to another, click Copy to.
Page 665: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-3] Extension-Portable Station-Flexible Button
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Each flexible button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 12 flexible buttons can be customised for each PS. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list. To copy values from one location to another, click the Copy to button.
Page 666 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection (for Call Park) Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically, or in a specific parking zone. Value Range Automatic, Specific Maintenance Console Location...
Page 667 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change) Specifies the TRS/Barring level to be used temporarily on a certain PS. Value Range Level 1–Level 7 Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) 2.7.4 Dial Tone Transfer...
Page 668 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension Extension Number (for DSS) Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Extension Number (for ICD Group) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed.
Page 669 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are forwarded. Value Range Max.
Page 670 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature Extension Number (for Two-way Record) Specifies the floating extension number of the UM group containing the PS’s mailbox. Value Range Max.
Page 671 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview Extension Number (for SDN) Specifies the floating extension number of the corresponding (owner) extension for the SDN button. Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function. Value Range Max.
Page 672 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 4.1.2.11 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol Dial (for NDSS) Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station Selection.
Page 673 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.13.2 Call Park Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer) Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch Two-way Transfer. (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss.) If the cell is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.
Page 674: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-3] Extension-Portable Station-Flexible Button-Flexible Button Data Copy
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button 12.2.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy The flexible button settings of a PS can be copied to different PSs. Destination Extension Line Select the number and name of the PS that will receive the copied settings. Multiple PSs can be selected. To select all PSs at once, click Select All.
Page 675: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-4] Extension-Portable Station-Ndss Link Data - Send
12.2.4 PBX Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send 12.2.4 PBX Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 676: Pbx Configuration-[4-3] Extension-Dss Console
12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console A DSS Console can be used in conjunction with a PT connected to the same PBX. The DPT Type—Type of the extension port that DSS Console is connected must be set to DSS in the Port Property screen of the extension card that the DSS console is connected to.
Page 677: Pbx Configuration-[5] Optional Device
Section 13 PBX Configuration—[5] Optional Device This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Optional Device menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 678: Pbx Configuration-[5-1] Optional Device-Doorphone
13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone The settings to establish doorphone calls can be programmed. To assign destinations for doorphone calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number Setting). The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 679 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone PC Programming Manual References 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table Feature Guide References 2.18.1 Doorphone Call Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number for the doorphone port in order to apply the Time Table (day/lunch/break/night). Value Range 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone...
Page 680 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Service Group Number Specifies the Service Group number sent to the Unified Messaging system when the incoming call destination is the floating extension number of a UM group. The Service Group number is used to allow the Unified Messaging system to send the applicable greeting message to the caller.
Page 681: Pbx Configuration-[5-2] Optional Device-External
13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager Settings for the external pager (external speaker) can be specified. Click Extension List View to view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types (see 6.5 Tool—Extension List View). Indicates the Site ID corresponding to the site numbers of PBXs in the One-look network (reference only).
Page 682: Pbx Configuration-[5-3] Optional Device-Voice Message
13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System 13.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3] Optional Device—Voice Message 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System Direct Inward System Access (DISA) enables outside callers to access specific PBX features as if the caller were using an SLT extension of the PBX. For more information on DISA, see "2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)"...
Page 683 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System Value Range Busy Tone, Enable, Busy Message Maintenance Console Location 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System DISA Intercept—Intercept when all DISA ports are busy Selects how DISA calls are handled if all DISA ports are currently in use. Value Range to Operator, to AA-0, to AA-9, Disable (Busy Tone) Maintenance Console Location...
Page 684 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Private Network Specifies whether the DISA port is released when a trunk-to-private trunk call using DISA is established. To enable this setting, " CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Private Network" on this screen should be set to "Enable".
Page 685 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System PC Programming Manual References 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1— CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Private Network CO-CO with DISA—Transfer by DTMF "#" (Activation Key Required) Specifies whether an outside party such as a cellular phone can transfer a trunk call to an extension within the PBX by dialling "#"...
Page 686: Pbx Configuration-[5-3-2] Optional Device-Voice Message-Disa Message
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Outgoing messages (OGM) for DISA calls can be specified. A maximum of 64 OGMs can be programmed. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.5 Tool—Extension List View).
Page 687 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Maintenance Console Location 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 2.28.2 Outgoing Message (OGM) 2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Busy / DND Message No. Selects the OGM to be played for the caller when the destination party is busy or sets DND. Value Range None, 1–64 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 688: Pbx Configuration-[5-4] Optional Device-External Relay
13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay Settings related to external relays can be programmed. Before programming these settings, For Output - Device Type must be set to "Relay" in the DOORPHONE card’s property settings. (® 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property) The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference.
Page 689 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay Feature Guide References 2.18.4 External Relay Control COS Number Specifies the Class of Service (COS) number. COS programming determines the extensions that are able to activate relays. Value Range 1–64 Maintenance Console Location 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device &...
Page 690: Pbx Configuration-[5-5] Optional Device-External Sensor
13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor Settings related to external sensors can be programmed. To assign destinations for sensor calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number Setting). The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 691 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor Feature Guide References 2.18.3 External Sensor Tenant No. Specifies the tenant to which the sensor belongs, to determine the Time Table for the sensor. (The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number.) Value Range 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor...
Page 692 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor PC Programming Manual...
Page 693: Pbx Configuration-[6] Feature
Section 14 PBX Configuration—[6] Feature This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Feature menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 694: Pbx Configuration-[6-1] Feature-System Speed Dial
14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial The System Speed Dialling Table is used to store frequently dialled numbers as well as callers who should be automatically routed to certain extensions when they call (Calling Line Identification [CLI] distribution). The System Speed Dialling Table is available for all extension users when making or receiving a call.
Page 695 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number Specifies the telephone number (including the Trunk Access number) or feature number assigned to the System Speed Dialling number. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial Feature Guide References...
Page 696: Pbx Configuration-[6-2] Feature-Hotel & Charge
14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Various settings related to the hospitality features of the PBX can be set. Main Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4 Specifies the numbers of the extensions designated as hotel operators. Value Range Max.
Page 697 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Maintenance Console Location 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge PC Programming Manual References 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 2.24.4 Timed Reminder SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8 Specifies the text of the message output on SMDR when this Printing Message is selected from an extension.
Page 698 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Checkout Billing—LCD for "Telephone" Specifies the name of charge item 1 as shown on the display of the hotel operator extension when entering room charges. Value Range Max.
Page 699 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for "Telephone" Specifies the name of charge item 1 as printed on the guest bill. Value Range Max. 12 characters Maintenance Console Location 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for "Minibar"...
Page 700 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Maintenance Console Location 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room SMDR for External Hotel Application—Header 1–3 Specifies the text printed at the top of the guest bill. Value Range Max.
Page 701 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 2.22.3 Call Charge Services 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Telephone" (%) Specifies the percentage tax rate to be used when calculating guest telephone charges. Value Range 0.00–99.99 % Maintenance Console Location 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel &...
Page 702 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point Specifies the number of digits to display after the decimal point for the currency in use. Value Range 0–6 Maintenance Console Location 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—...
Page 703 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Charge Options—Currency Display Position Specifies whether the currency characters are displayed before or after the call charge. Value Range Head, Tail Maintenance Console Location 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—...
Page 704 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit Feature Guide References 2.22.3 Call Charge Services...
Page 705: Pbx Configuration-[6-3] Feature-Verification Code
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code A verification code is used to override the Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) of the extension in use to make a certain trunk call, or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes. A maximum of 1000 verification codes can be programmed with other related parameters.
Page 706: Itemised Billing Code For Ars
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code Value Range Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code Feature Guide References 2.7.6 Verification Code Entry COS Number Specifies the COS that applies when making a trunk call with the verification code. Value Range 1–64 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 707: Budget Management
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code Budget Management Specifies the limit of the call charge that will be counted on the verification code. The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point in 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge. Value Range 0–9999999 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 708: Pbx Configuration-[6-4] Feature-Second Dial Tone
14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second Dial Tone 14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second Dial Tone A programmed Pause time can be inserted automatically between the Second Dial Tone Waiting code and the following digits. When a programmed Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialled after seizing a trunk, a pre-programmed number of pauses are inserted after the code.
Page 709: Pbx Configuration-[6-5] Feature-Absent Message
14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message 14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message When a display PT user calls an extension, a message is shown on the caller’s telephone display describing the reason for absence. A maximum of 8 Absent Messages can be programmed, and any extension user can select one of them.
Page 710: Pbx Configuration-[6-6] Feature-Tenant
14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant A maximum of 32 tenants can share the PBX. Each tenant is composed of specified extension user groups. The PBX offers each tenant its own Time Table and system resources. To assign extensions as operators easily, click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number Setting).
Page 711: System Speed Dial
14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant Value Range Off: ARS is disabled. On for Local Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any Idle Line Access method. On for Any CO Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any Trunk Access method.
Page 712 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant 1–16: Use the clock of the PBX in the One-look network with the selected Site ID. Maintenance Console Location 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant Feature Guide References 5.1.3 Tenant Service 5.1.4 Time Service PC Programming Manual...
Page 713: Pbx Configuration-[7] Trs
Section 15 PBX Configuration—[7] TRS This section serves as reference operating instructions for the TRS menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 714: Pbx Configuration-[7-1] Trs-Denied Code
15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code 15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are allowed).
Page 715: Pbx Configuration-[7-2] Trs-Exception Code
15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code 15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are allowed).
Page 716: Pbx Configuration-[7-3] Trs-Special Carrier
15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier 15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier If the PBX has access to multiple telephone companies, a Special Carrier Access Code is required each time a trunk call is made. By programming these Special Carrier Access Codes here, Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) can restrict or allow calls to be made by ignoring the codes and looking at the telephone number only.
Page 717: Pbx Configuration-[7-4] Trs-Emergency Dial
15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial 15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial Any extension user can dial the programmed emergency numbers at any time after seizing a trunk. The restrictions imposed on the extension, such as Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring), Account Code—Forced mode, and Extension Dial Lock are disregarded.
Page 718: Pbx Configuration-[7-5] Trs-Miscellaneous
15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. The following optional settings can be programmed to activate a TRS/Barring check, override TRS/Barring, or switch between TRS/Barring methods. TRS Override by System Speed Dialling Enables an outgoing trunk call to override TRS/Barring when the call is made using System Speed Dialling.
Page 719 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous Maintenance Console Location 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous PC Programming Manual References 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits Specifies a limit to be placed on the number of digits which can be dialled after an extension user receives a trunk call.
Page 720 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous Deny Table N + Except Table N: Each level has its own separate set of denied codes and exception codes, which are only applied to that level. Maintenance Console Location 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous Feature Guide References 2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) PC Programming Manual...
Page 721: Pbx Configuration-[8] Ars
Section 16 PBX Configuration—[8] ARS This section serves as reference operating instructions for the ARS menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 722: Pbx Configuration-[8-1] Ars-System Setting
16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting Automatic Route Selection (ARS) automatically selects the appropriate carrier at the time a trunk call is made, according to the programmed settings. The user-dialled number will be checked and modified in order to connect it to the appropriate carrier.
Page 723: Pbx Configuration-[8-2] Ars-Leading Number
16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number Specifies the area codes and/or telephone numbers as leading numbers that will be routed by the ARS feature. A maximum of 1000 different leading numbers can be programmed, and each leading number can select a Routing Plan Table number, which determines the ARS procedure.
Page 724 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number Maintenance Console Location 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number Feature Guide References 2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) PC Programming Manual...
Page 725: Pbx Configuration-[8-3] Ars-Routing Plan Time
16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time 16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time The start and end times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks are shown for each day of the week. There are 48 Routing Plan Tables, and each Routing Plan Table can have its own time blocks. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list.
Page 726: Pbx Configuration-[8-3] Ars-Routing Plan Time-Time Setting
16.3.1 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time Setting 16.3.1 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time Setting The start times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected Routing Plan. Each time block automatically ends when the subsequent block begins. Time-A–D—Setting Enables the setting of the start time for each time block.
Page 727: Pbx Configuration-[8-4] Ars-Routing Plan Priority
16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan Priority 16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan Priority The carrier priority (1 through 6) in a Routing Plan Table can be programmed for each time zone of each day of the week. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list. Select the desired day of the week by clicking the applicable tab.
Page 728: Pbx Configuration-[8-5] Ars-Carrier
16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier Carrier It is possible to specify how user-dialled numbers are modified for connecting to the appropriate carrier. A maximum of 48 different carriers can be programmed to be used with the ARS feature. Carrier Name Specifies the carrier name.
Page 729 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier Carrier Access Code Specifies the carrier access code. The carrier access code can be added to the user-dialled number by specifying "C" in Modify Command on this screen. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier Feature Guide References...
Page 730 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier Feature Guide References 2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 5.1.3 Tenant Service PC Programming Manual...
Page 731: Pbx Configuration-[8-6] Ars-Leading Number Exception
16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading Number Exception 16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading Number Exception Specifies telephone numbers that will not be connected using the ARS feature. When the user-dialled number includes a leading number exception, the PBX sends the number to a trunk by the Idle Line Access method if ARS Mode in 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting is "on".
Page 732: Pbx Configuration-[8-7] Ars-Authorisation Code For Trg
16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG 16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG An Authorisation code can be specified for each trunk group. The Authorisation codes entered here can be added to user-dialled numbers by adding "G" to the Modify Command specified on the Carrier tab of screen 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier.
Page 733: Pbx Configuration-[9] Private Network
Section 17 PBX Configuration—[9] Private Network This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Private Network menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 734: Pbx Configuration-[9-1] Private Network-Tie Table
17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations. A maximum of 32 TIE Line Routing and Modification Tables can be programmed. It is necessary to make unified tables with all PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network in order to identify the trunk route to be used when an extension makes or receives a TIE line call.
Page 735: Trunk Group
17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table Removed Number of Digits Specifies the number of leading digits of the dialled number to be removed for each priority. Value Range 0–15 Maintenance Console Location 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table Feature Guide References 4.3.1 TIE Line Service Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the dialled number in place of the removed digits for each priority.
Page 736 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table Value Range Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table Feature Guide References 4.3.5 QSIG Enhanced Features Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key Required) Enables Network Message Waiting information to be sent from the PBX to which the voice mail system is attached to extensions connected to other PBXs in the network.
Page 737: Pbx Configuration-[9-2] Private Network-Network Data Transmission
17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission Settings related to the transmission of extension BLF (Busy Line Field) data or Message Waiting notifications over a network of PBXs can be programmed. Extension BLF data is used to show the status of a monitored extension attached to another PBX on a Network DSS (NDSS) button.
Page 738 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission Feature Guide References 4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data Transmission ISDN->VoIP Selects whether to re-send BLF data received from an ISDN port through any VoIP ports that are set to transmit BLF data.
Page 739 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission Maintenance Console Location 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission Feature Guide References 4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Counter Specifies the number of times re-transmission of network message waiting notifications is repeated before being cancelled.
Page 740: Pbx Configuration-[9-3] Private Network-Network Operator (Voip)
17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP) 17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP) This screen allows network operators to be programmed. A network operator is an extension at a remote PBX that will monitor other PBX extensions using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS). The settings on this screen should be programmed at the PBX that is to be monitored ( Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID 2–8).
Page 741 17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP) Maintenance Console Location 17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP) PC Programming Manual References 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Feature Guide References 4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) PC Programming Manual...
Page 742: Pbx Configuration-[9-4] Private Network-Ndss Key Table
17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table Extensions at up to 7 other PBXs that will be monitored using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) can be registered. A maximum of 250 extensions can be registered. To create an NDSS button to monitor an extension, the extension must be registered here first.
Page 743 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table Maintenance Console Location 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table PC Programming Manual References 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission— Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID Feature Guide References 4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) PC Programming Manual...
Page 744: Pbx Configuration-[9-5] Private Network-Centralised Um/Vm Unit
17.5 PBX Configuration—[9-5] Private Network—Centralised UM/VM Unit 17.5 PBX Configuration—[9-5] Private Network—Centralised UM/VM Unit View and programme settings for using the Unified Messaging system and VPSs in a private network. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.5 Tool—Extension List View).
Page 745: Pbx Configuration-[10] Co & Incoming Call
Section 18 PBX Configuration—[10] CO & Incoming Call This section serves as reference operating instructions for the CO & Incoming Call menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 746: Pbx Configuration-[10-1] Co & Incoming Call-Co Line Settings
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings Trunks can be assigned a name, and grouped into a maximum of 256 trunk groups. The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 747: Pbx Configuration-[10-2] Co & Incoming Call-Dil Table & Port Settings
18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Direct In Line (DIL) or Direct Dialling In (DDI)/Direct Inward Dialling (DID) can be selected for each trunk as the method of distributing incoming trunk calls to certain destinations.
Page 748 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Distribution Method Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls. The value range of this setting depends on the card type and Trunk Property assigned for each trunk. Value Range DIL: Distribution depends on the trunk through which the calls arrive DDI/DID: Distribution depends on the DDI/DID number of the calls MSN: Distribution depends on the MSN of the calls...
Page 749 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings 5.1.3 Tenant Service 5.1.4 Time Service UM Service Group No. Specifies the Service Group number sent to the Unified Messaging system when the incoming call destination is the floating extension number of a UM group. The Service Group number is used to allow the Unified Messaging system to send the applicable greeting message to the caller.
Page 750 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Maintenance Console Location 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Feature Guide References 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY Trunk Property Indicates the networking type of each trunk (reference only). Value Range Public, Private(TIE), VPN Maintenance Console Location...
Page 751 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Feature Guide References 2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL) 2.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution DDI / DID / TIE / MSN For each trunk to which DDI/DID distribution is set, or for each trunk whose Trunk Property on this screen is Private (TIE), modification parameters for DDI/DID number and TIE line call numbers can be programmed.
Page 752 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Maintenance Console Location 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Feature Guide References 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) 2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Remove Digit Specifies the number of leading digits to be removed from the incoming called number for DDI/DID distribution...
Page 753: Pbx Configuration-[10-3] Co & Incoming Call-Ddi / Did Table
18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Incoming trunk calls with DDI/DID numbers can be distributed to specific destinations. Each DDI/DID number has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). When CLI distribution is enabled for a DDI/DID number, incoming trunk calls with that DDI/DID number will be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DDI/DID destinations) if the caller’s identification number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table, which is used as the Caller ID Table.
Page 754 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Feature Guide References 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) DDI / DID Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the DDI/DID destination in each time mode. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO &...
Page 755 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Value Range None, 1–64 Maintenance Console Location 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Feature Guide References 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview VM Trunk Group No.
Page 756: Pbx Configuration-[10-3] Co & Incoming Call-Ddi / Did Table-Automatic Registration
18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration 18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration Automatic Registration allows DDI/DID numbers and DDI/DID destinations in each time mode (day/lunch/ break/night) to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series. Beginning Entry Location Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.
Page 757 18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration Maintenance Console Location 18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration PC Programming Manual References 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Feature Guide References 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the number of the DDI/DID destination in each time mode for the first location to be programmed.
Page 758: Pbx Configuration-[10-3] Co & Incoming Call-Ddi / Did Table-Name Generate
18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate Name Generate allows DDI/DID names to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series. If a name generated here is longer than 20 characters, the additional characters will be discarded. Beginning Entry Location Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.
Page 759 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate Maintenance Console Location 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate PC Programming Manual References 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Feature Guide References 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) Name Prefix Specifies the text to be included at the start of each DDI/DID name.
Page 760: Pbx Configuration-[10-4] Co & Incoming Call-Msn Table
18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table Incoming ISDN-BRI (Basic Rate Interface) line calls with Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSNs) can be distributed to a certain destination. Each MSN has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/ break/night).
Page 761 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table Port Indicates the port number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table MSN Number Specifies the MSN.
Page 762 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table PC Programming Manual References 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References 2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time...
Page 763 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table PC Programming Manual References 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References 2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service VM Trunk Group No. Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the incoming call destination is the floating extension number of a VM (DPT) Group (connected to a KX-NCP/KX-TDE series PBX).
Page 764 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table Slot Indicates the slot position of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table Port Indicates the port number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only).
Page 765: Pbx Configuration-[10-5] Co & Incoming Call-Miscellaneous
18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous 18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous The Intercept Routing feature can activate when the destination of an incoming call is unavailable, or when there is no destination for the call, to reroute the call to an alternate destination. Intercept—Intercept Routing - DND (Destination sets DND.) Enables the Intercept Routing—DND feature to activate when the original destination is in DND mode.
Page 766 18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous Maintenance Console Location 18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous Feature Guide References 2.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination PC Programming Manual...
Page 767: Pbx Configuration-[11] Maintenance
Section 19 PBX Configuration—[11] Maintenance This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Maintenance menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 768: Pbx Configuration-[11-1] Maintenance-Main
19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main SMDR Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically records detailed information about incoming and outgoing calls. SMDR Format—Type Selects the format of SMDR output. Value Range Type A: 80 digits without call charge information Type B: 80 digits with call charge information Type C: 120 digits Maintenance Console Location...
Page 769 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) SMDR Format—Blank Footer Length (Number of Lines) Specifies the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page. The number of lines for the skip perforation should be shorter than the page length.
Page 770 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Print Information—Outgoing Call Specifies whether the dialled digits of outgoing trunk calls are printed. Class of Service (COS) programming determines the printable records. Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO &...
Page 771 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Print Information—Log-in / Log-out Specifies whether the log-in/log-out status is printed. Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Print Information—Hotel Room Status Selects whether check-in and check-out data is output on SMDR.
Page 772 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 2.24.4 Timed Reminder Print Information—Error Log Specifies whether PBX error log information is output to SMDR. Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 5.6.4 Local Alarm Information...
Page 773 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Option—DDI/DID Number & Name Selects the printing format of incoming trunk calls with a DDI/DID number. Value Range None, Number, Name, Name + Number Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Page 774 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main PC Programming Manual References 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—SMDR— Print Information—Outgoing Call Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Option—Condition Code "RC" Specifies whether the time of receiving an incoming trunk call is printed. Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main...
Page 775 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main PC Programming Manual References 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) LAN—SMDR Port Number Specifies the port number used to output SMDR data via the LAN. Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main...
Page 776 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) RS-232C Communication—Baud Rate Specifies the data transmission speed from the PBX to the printer or personal computer. To ensure stable transmission, when changing this setting to 57600 or 115200 bps, set Communication—Flow on this screen to Hardware.
Page 777 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Communication—NL Code Specifies the NL (New Line) code for the printer or personal computer. If the printer or personal computer automatically feeds lines with a carriage return, select CR (Carriage Return). If not, select CR + LF (Line Feed).
Page 778 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) External Modem Command—Automatic Initialisation Specifies the command to automatically initialise an external modem when it is plugged into the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port of the PBX.
Page 779 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Daily Test Start Time—Hour Specifies the hour of the PBX daily self check start time. Value Range 0–23 Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 5.6.4 Local Alarm Information Daily Test Start Time—Minute Specifies the minute of the PBX daily self check start time.
Page 780 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Value Range 3-300 (sec) Maintenance Console Location 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main PC Programming Manual References 7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Counter) Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if network message waiting information is deleted after re-transmission is repeated for the number of times specified in Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Counter in 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2]...
Page 781 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main PC Programming Manual References 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table— Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key Required) Feature Guide References 4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail Password Passwords authorise the user to programme the extension and the PBX by a PT or a personal computer. Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1 Specifies the manager password to authorise the PT user to access manager programming.
Page 782: Pbx Configuration-[11-2] Maintenance-Air Synchronisation
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Note CSs connected to legacy gateways can be used together with IP-CSs connected to the KX-NS1000 system. CSs connected to legacy gateways must be registered to Air Synchronisation Group Number 1. Do not register CSs connected to legacy gateways to any other Air Synchronisation Group Number.
Page 783 19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation Maintenance Console Location 19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port. Value Range INS: The port is in service.
Page 784 19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation Primary CS—Slot Indicates the slot position of the primary CS (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation Primary CS—Port Indicates the port number of the primary CS (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location...
Page 785 19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation Maintenance Console Location 19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation Secondary CS—Port Indicates the port number of the secondary CS (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation Secondary CS—CS Name Indicates the name of the secondary CS (reference only).
Page 786: Pbx Configuration-[11-3] Maintenance-Power Failure Transfer
Maintenance—Power Failure Transfer section in the PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX. The following programming items are specific to the KX-NS1000 Web Maintenance Console. Using the Site selection drop-down list, select the site where the legacy gateway PBX is connected, and then programme the settings.
Page 787: Um Configuration-[1] Mailbox Settings
Section 20 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Mailbox Settings menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 788: Um Configuration-[1] Mailbox Settings
20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting 20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings A maximum of 1022 subscriber mailboxes can be created. Although the System Manager can use a telephone to create or edit mailboxes, the System Administrator can create several mailboxes at once using Web Maintenance Console.
Page 789 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting Feature Guide References 3.2.2 Subscriber Features—3.2.2.20 Mailbox Extension Specifies the extension number of the mailbox’s subscriber. Any valid extension number including an Extension Group number can be assigned. Note If an Extension Group number is assigned to a mailbox, all group members are able to access the messages stored in the mailbox.
Page 790: Um Configuration-[1-2] Mailbox Settings-Full Setting
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Maintenance Console Location 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Mailbox Parameters Mailbox Number Specifies the subscriber’s mailbox number. The maximum number of digits that can be used for mailbox numbers is set in 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Mailbox—...
Page 791 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters PC Programming Manual References 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service— Directory Listing Feature Guide References 3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name Last Name Specifies the last name of the subscriber.
Page 792 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters PC Programming Manual References 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security—Subscriber Feature Guide References 3.1.2.4 Password Administration Mailbox Password (Message client) Specifies the password needed to access the mailbox when using a client software programme. If a default password is programmed by an administrator, that password will be assigned automatically when creating all mailboxes.
Page 793 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range COS No. 1–62 Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters PC Programming Manual References 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Feature Guide References 3.2.1.11 Class of Service (COS) Covering Extension Forwards calls to a second extension when the first extension’s subscriber is not available to take the call.
Page 794 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Guide References 3.2.1.25 Interview Service All Calls Transfer to Mailbox If this parameter is set to "Yes", the extension is considered to be a Logical Extension and therefore calls directed to the extension via Automated Attendant service are automatically forwarded to the extension mailbox.
Page 795 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Call Transfer Sequence (Other) Specifies the Call Transfer Sequence used by the mailbox. Only specified if Call Transfer Sequence (Selection) is set to "Other". Value Range Enter a maximum of 16 characters consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes: D: Disconnecting F: Flash (Recall)
Page 796 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range None: Rings the subscriber’s extension. Call blocking: Handles the call according to the Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer setting for the subscriber’s extension. The subscriber’s extension will not ring. Call screening: The caller is prompted to record his or her name. The Unified Messaging system then calls the subscriber and plays back the caller name.
Page 797 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting • More than one option can be selected. Value Range Leave a Message: Allows the caller to record a message. Transfer to a covering extension: Transfers the caller to a covering extension. Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging: Pages the subscriber by intercom. Transfer to operator: Transfers the caller to an operator.
Page 798 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Guide References 3.2.1.30 Message Waiting Notification—Lamp Telephone Device Specifies the Message Waiting Notification schedule for each device. The following parameters can be specified for devices 1, 2, and 3. Click Edit for the extension to change, set Device Notification for Unreceived Message to "Yes", and programme the settings, then click OK to finish.
Page 799 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Dial Number [0-9 * # T X , ;] Assigns a telephone number to Device 1, 2, or 3. The subscriber can also specify the number to be dialled by entering it from his or her telephone, allowing the subscriber to set this feature on a case by case basis.
Page 800 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Guide References 3.2.1.31 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—No Answer Delay Time (min) Specifies the time (in minutes) the Unified Messaging system waits before retrying message notification when the called device does not answer. Value Range 1–120 min Maintenance Console Location...
Page 801 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.31 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device Telephone Device—Device Notification Timer—Device Interval Time between Device 1, 2, 3 and Next Device Specifies how long the PBX waits after sending Message Waiting Notification to Device 1, 2, or 3 before sending notification to the next device.
Page 802 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Notification Type Specifies the type of Message Waiting Notification to be sent. Notification can be sent for all messages, or voice messages or fax messages only.
Page 803 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Guide References 3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title String Specifies the text string to be included as part of the title of the notification. Value Range Max. 30 characters Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters Feature Guide References...
Page 804 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Attach Fax File Specifies whether to attach a fax image file of fax messages to the notification e-mail. Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location...
Page 805 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/Personal Custom Serv This tab contains programming items for External Message Delivery, Auto Forwarding, and Personal Custom Service settings. External Message Delivery Active If set to "Yes", subscribers are able to utilise the External Message Delivery feature. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location...
Page 806 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Auto Forwarding Active If set to "Yes", the Unified Messaging system automatically forwards messages that have not been played for a specified length of time to another mailbox. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/Personal Custom Serv Feature Guide References...
Page 807 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Guide References 3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding Auto Forwarding Message Type Specifies whether all messages, or only voice messages or only fax messages are forwarded. Value Range All Messages, Voice Messages, Fax Messages Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/Personal Custom Serv Feature Guide References...
Page 808 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Auto Forwarding Mode - Message Remains New Specifies if the forwarded messages remain marked as new. This setting is available only when Auto Forwarding Mode is set to "Copy". Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/Personal Custom Serv Feature Guide References...
Page 809 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting • Transfer to Automated Attendant Service: Allows the caller to access Automated Attendant Service. • Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller to the Custom Service specified here. • Transfer to operator: Connects the caller to an operator. •...
Page 810 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Disconnect (All Day): The line will be disconnected, regardless of the time of day. Disconnect (Only After Hours): The line will be disconnected only after hours. Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/Personal Custom Serv Feature Guide References 3.2.2.24 Personal Custom Service...
Page 811 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Follow the steps below to edit list members. Click Edit for a List Members item. Under Subscribers To Add, click the checkbox in No. for each mailbox to add, referring to the mailbox numbers and mailbox owners’ names. Click Add.
Page 812 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Auto Login Extension When this item is set to "Enable", subscribers are able to access their mailbox directly without entering the mailbox number. Subscribers can automatically log in from their extensions, by calling from an outside telephone whose number is stored as a Caller ID number, or by dialling a telephone number assigned to a specified DID number or trunk.
Page 813 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Auto Login Caller ID Password Entry Requirement Specifies if a password is required for entry when automatic login is performed using the Caller ID of the number set in Auto Login Caller ID 1 or Auto Login Caller ID 2. Value Range Yes, No Notice...
Page 814 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Auto Login DDI/DID, TRG No. Password Entry Requirement Specifies if a password is required for entry when automatic login is performed using the trunk group number or the DID number. Value Range Yes, No Notice If this is set to "No", ensure that unauthorised third-parties are not allowed access to any extensions using the specified trunk group number.
Page 815 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Record Busy Greeting: The subscriber can record the greeting played when their extension is busy. Record After Hours Greeting: The subscriber can record the greeting played when the system is in night mode. Record Temporary Greeting: The subscriber can record a greeting that is used exclusively until the subscriber disables it.
Page 816 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting X: Callback Number Entry Code 0–9, , #: Dial Code Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Fax Options Feature Guide References 3.2.2.2 Automatic Fax Delivery Automatic Delivery Status Printed Fax Message Specifies if automatically forwarded faxes are marked as "old" or "new", or deleted. Value Range Delete Automatically, Save as Old, Save as New Maintenance Console Location...
Page 817 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting No Space for Receiving Coverage Mode Specifies the action taken when there is not enough free space in the mailbox to save a fax message in the mailbox. Value Range Transfer to Fax Extension: Transfers the fax to a specified fax extension. Receive in GDM: The fax is redirected to the general delivery mailbox.
Page 818 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Subscriber Service - All Messages Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of all messages in their mailbox when the subscriber logs in. Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Announce Number of Messages Subscriber Service - New Voice Messages Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new voice messages in their mailbox when the subscriber logs in.
Page 819 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Announce Number of Messages Receiving Message Service - All Messages Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of all messages in their mailbox when the subscriber has selected to listen to messages.
Page 820: Um Configuration-[1-3] Mailbox Settings-Auto Configuration
20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Announce Number of Messages Message Client Display Language Specifies the language of information generated by the UM system for the mail (IMAP) client. Value Range English, French, German, Italian, Dutch, Spanish, Portuguese, Russian Maintenance Console Location 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Announce Number of Messages Quick Menu and Greeting Recording...
Page 821 20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration Note In Re-Create all mailboxes mode, all voice data is deleted, including data that is recorded in mailboxes. It is strongly recommended that you backup the voice data that has been recorded in mailboxes. Value Range Create User profiles and mailboxes for all extensions (default) Re-create all mailboxes...
Page 822 20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration PC Programming Manual...
Page 823: Um Configuration-[2] Class Of Service
Section 21 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Class of Service menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 824: Um Configuration-[2] Class Of Service
21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Each mailbox is assigned a Class of Service (COS) that determines the set of services that are available to its subscriber. There are 64 classes. Mailboxes can be assigned to their own or to the same COS as needed. COS No.
Page 825 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General Feature Guide References 3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name Tutorial The tutorial is a series of voice prompts for setting up the mailbox that is played to subscribers when they first log in to their mailbox.
Page 826 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service E-mail Option Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service can receive notifications by e-mail when they have a new message waiting. Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General Feature Guide References 3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device Fax Option...
Page 827 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General Feature Guide References 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview Message Manager Authority Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service have access to the Unified Messaging system as a Message Manager.
Page 828 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox Message Length (Limited) (min) Specifies the maximum recording time for messages left to subscribers in the Class of Service. Only specified Message Length (Selection) is set to "Limited". Value Range 1–60 min Maintenance Console Location...
Page 829 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service New Message Retention Time (Limited) (days) Defines the number of days that new messages will remain in mailboxes for subscribers in the Class of Service. The storage period begins the day after the message reception. Only specified if New Message Retention Time (Selection) is set to "Limited".
Page 830 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Number of CIDs for Caller Name Announcement (Selection) Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service can assign telephone numbers for the Personal Caller Name Announcement feature. Note This setting is not available for COS 63 (Message Manager) and COS 64 (System Manager). Value Range None, Other Maintenance Console Location...
Page 831 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox Mailbox Capacity Warning (Other) (min) Specifies when the system alerts mailbox subscribers in the Class of Service that the programmed recording time for mailboxes is reaching its set amount of message storage time. The setting indicates the remaining recording time capacity threshold for when the announcement is heard.
Page 832 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Delete Message Confirmation If set to "Yes", the system requests confirmation from subscribers in the Class of Service before erasing a message in the mailbox. If set to "No", the message is erased immediately. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location...
Page 833 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox Feature Guide References 3.2.2.1 Auto Receipt Autoplay New Message If set to "Yes", the system plays new messages automatically when subscribers in the Class of Service log into their mailboxes.
Page 834 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Announce Message Transferred Information If set to "Yes", the system plays the information of transferred messages to subscribers in the Class of Service before playing the messages. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox Caller ID Number Announcement Specifies whether or not the system announces the Caller ID number when a subscriber in the Class of Service...
Page 835: Call Transfer
21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Password Expiry Period (Selection) Specifies if the mailbox passwords for subscribers in the Class of Service will expire after a set time. Value Range Disable, Other Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox Feature Guide References 3.1.2.4 Password Administration Password Expiry Period (Other)
Page 836 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Note This setting is not available for COS 63 (Message Manager). Value Range 1–33 Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Call Transfer PC Programming Manual References 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Intercom Paging Parameters Use Call Waiting on Busy If set to "Yes", the system signals subscribers in the Class of Service when they are on a call and another call is received.
Page 837 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Notify of Transfer If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of Service will hear "You have a call." when they answer transferred calls. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Call Transfer Call Transfer to Outside If set to "Yes", the system allows calls to be transferred to a trunk via the following features: Custom Service, Caller ID Callback, Call Transfer Service, Personal Custom Service, Call-through Service.
Page 838 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Password Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service are given a voice prompt selection to change their password when accessing their mailbox. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Hospitality Mode PC Programming Manual References 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—...
Page 839 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Feature Guide References 3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode Erase When Check Out - Password Specifies if the password of the subscriber in the Class of Service is erased when the subscriber’s extension is set to the "Check Out" status. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location...
Page 840 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service 3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode PC Programming Manual...
Page 841: Um Configuration-[3] Um Extension / Trunk Service
Section 22 UM Configuration—[3] UM Extension / Trunk Service This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Port/Trunk Service menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 842: Um Configuration-[3-1] Um Extension / Trunk Service-Service Group
22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group The parameters of Service Groups determine how calls are handled throughout the day. Each Service Group (therefore each port) can have a different call service for each time mode (day, night, lunch, break). One of 6 incoming call services (Voice Mail, Automated Attendant, Interview, Custom Service, Fax, or Transfer to Mailbox) can be assigned to each call service.
Page 843 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group Maintenance Console Location 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Parameter Specifies the parameter for the type of Incoming Call Service specified. This is disabled if "Voice Mail Service"...
Page 844 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Prompt for No DTMF Input Callers Specifies which language is used when a caller cannot enter any digits to select a language after the Multilingual Selection Menu has been played.
Page 845: Um Configuration-[3-2] Um Extension / Trunk Service-Port Assignment
22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment 22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment You can assign a Service Group created in 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group to each UM port. For each UM port number, select a Service Group number (1–64) from the Service Group drop-down list. Click OK when finished.
Page 846 22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment PC Programming Manual...
Page 847: Um Configuration-[4] Service Settings
Section 23 UM Configuration—[4] Service Settings This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Service Settings menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 848: Um Configuration-[4-1] Service Settings-Caller Id / Pin Call Routing
23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing A maximum of 200 Caller ID/PIN numbers can be assigned so that callers are automatically forwarded to a pre-programmed destination. A different destination can be set for each time mode (day, night, lunch, break). For Mode, select Caller-ID Mode or PIN Mode from the drop-down list, and then click the button to assign a routing destination.
Page 849 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing Maintenance Console Location 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing Feature Guide References 3.2.1.8 Caller ID Call Routing Description Specifies a name and/or description of the Caller ID number. Note When no data is specified in this parameter, the caller’s name will be automatically entered here if the caller’s name is received from the telephone company.
Page 850 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing PIN Mode PIN No. Specifies a PIN number (or range of PIN numbers using the wild card, " ") for callers from a specific number or range of numbers that are to be automatically forwarded to a pre-programmed destination. For more information on using "...
Page 851 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing Feature Guide References 3.2.1.36 PIN Call Routing PC Programming Manual...
Page 852: Um Configuration-[4-2] Service Settings-Parameters
23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Automated Attendant Wait Time for First Digit (0-20 s) Specifies the length of time the system waits for the caller to dial a digit before assuming the caller cannot input a DTMF signal and therefore activates No DTMF Input Call Coverage Value Range 0–20 s...
Page 853 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Operator Service When operator calls are made, calls are connected to the lowest-numbered operator that is available. To enable/disable the operator setting for each time mode, check/uncheck it. Note • The extension assigned as Operator 1 for day mode is automatically designated as the Message Manager.
Page 854 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Operator Service—Operator’s Mailbox Specifies the mailbox number for Operator 1, 2, and 3. Callers to Operator 1, 2, or 3 are prompted to leave a message in this mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage Mode or No Answer Coverage Mode is set. Value Range 2–8 digits Maintenance Console Location...
Page 855 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters PC Programming Manual References 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting— No DTMF Input Operation Feature Guide References 3.2.1.35 Operator Service Operator Service—Operator No Answer Time (10-60 s) When a call to an operator is not answered within the time set, the system will offer other options as defined Operator Service—No Answer Coverage Mode.
Page 856 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA) Call Hold Mode—Call Retrieval Announcement Timing (1-30 s) Specifies the interval between the voice guidance message that asks whether or not calls are to be retrieved during call holding.
Page 857 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Adding an Alternate Extension Click New. Enter an extension number. Click OK. Editing an Alternate Extension Select the desired alternate extension. Click Edit. Edit the extension number. Click OK. Deleting an Alternate Extension Select the desired alternate extension. Click Delete.
Page 858 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA) Operator Transfer Mode Specifies the timing of the operator transfer. Value Range Transfer immediately, Do not transfer immediately Maintenance Console Location 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA) No DTMF Input Operation No DTMF Input Call Coverage for Day, Night, Lunch, and Break (Selection)
Page 859 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.33 No DTMF Input Operation Name Entry Number of Digits to Entry Name (3-4 digits) Specifies the number of digits (letters) that must be entered when using the Dial by Name feature, which allows callers to connect themselves with the desired party by entering the first 3 or 4 letters of the party’s name.
Page 860 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name Name Directory Mode Specifies one of Last Name, First Name, or Both to be used when entering the name. Value Range Last, First, Both Maintenance Console Location 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name Toll Saver...
Page 861: Um Configuration-[4-3] Service Settings-Custom Service
23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service A Custom Service allows callers to perform specific functions by pressing dial buttons on their telephones while listening to voice guidance (Custom Service Menu). Custom Services allow callers to connect themselves to an extension, mailbox, Mailbox Group, operator, fax machine, etc., without the assistance of an operator.
Page 862 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service [From the Custom Service Diagram] Double-click the desired Custom Service icon in the diagram, or right-click on the desired icon and select Edit. Edit the parameters in the Custom Service parameters dialogue box. Click OK. Example: Setting "Menu &...
Page 863: Um Configuration-[4-3] Service Settings-Custom Service-Menu & Transfer
23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer The below parameters are set for the Menu Transfer Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder. This Custom Service type guides callers to press certain buttons to connect themselves with the designated party.
Page 864 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer Menu Repeat Cycle (1-3) Specifies the number of times the Custom Service menu message will be repeated for the caller. Value Range 1–3 times Maintenance Console Location 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer Feature Guide References 3.2.1.15 Custom Service Call Transfer Anytime...
Page 865 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer Maintenance Console Location 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer Feature Guide References 3.2.1.15 Custom Service Wait for Second Digit (1-5 s) This parameter is only valid when Call Transfer Anytime is set to a value other than "No". After the caller dials a digit (the first digit) after listening to a Custom Service menu, the system waits for a second digit to be dialled.
Page 866 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer Key – Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, # Any of the 16 operations listed below can be assigned to the 0 through 9, , and # keys on the telephone keypad. Callers are able to access these operations by pressing the corresponding keys on their telephones. Value Range Trf to Mbx: Allows the caller to leave messages in a specified mailbox.
Page 867: Um Configuration-[4-3] Service Settings-Custom Service-Date Control
23.3.2 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control 23.3.2 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control The below parameters are set for the Date Control Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder. This service allows you to assign a different operation for up to 5 time periods. The caller makes no selection and no menu is announced.
Page 868 23.3.2 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control Feature Guide References 3.2.1.15 Custom Service PC Programming Manual...
Page 869: Um Configuration-[4-3] Service Settings-Custom Service-Time Control
23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control 23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control The below parameters are set for the Time Control Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder. This service allows you to assign a different operation for up to 5 blocks of time during the day. The caller makes no selection and no menu is announced.
Page 870 23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control Maintenance Console Location 23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control Feature Guide References 3.2.1.15 Custom Service PC Programming Manual...
Page 871: Um Configuration-[4-3] Service Settings-Custom Service-Day Control
23.3.4 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Day Control 23.3.4 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Day Control The below parameters are set for the Menu Transfer Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder. This service allows you to assign a different operation for each day of the week, and for all holidays. The caller makes no selection and no menu is announced.
Page 872: Um Configuration-[4-3] Service Settings-Custom Service-Password
23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password 23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password The below parameters are set for the Password Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder. This service requires that callers enter a password, followed by "#". Each password is assigned an operation. If a password is entered correctly, the caller is handled by the password’s pre-programmed operation.
Page 873 23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password Feature Guide References 3.2.1.15 Custom Service Maximum Number of Invalid Entry (1-10) Specifies the number of times an invalid password is entered before the operation assigned for Entry Failure is executed. Value Range 1–10 times Maintenance Console Location 23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password Feature Guide References...
Page 874 23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password Feature Guide References 3.2.1.15 Custom Service Pass1–5, Cancel Pass1–5: Specifies a password and an operation for the specified password. Cancel: Determines the operation that is activated when a caller presses "#" to cancel password entry. Value Range Pass1–5: Password: Max.
Page 875: Um Configuration-[4-4] Service Settings-Holiday Table
23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table Holidays can be set for and assigned to trunks and Unified Messaging ports. When a call is received from a certain trunk or by a certain subscriber during the time frame set for an assigned holiday, the call handling settings for that holiday will be used.
Page 876 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table Maintenance Console Location 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table Feature Guide References 3.2.1.21 Holiday Service Start Time Specifies the time of day on the specified date at which to begin the holiday service. Click the cell to display an array of hours and minutes.
Page 877 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table Feature Guide References 3.2.1.21 Holiday Service Retain Holiday If "Yes" is selected, the holiday will not end regardless of the end time setting. To end the holiday setting when "Yes" is selected and the end time has already passed, set Setting to "Disable"...
Page 878 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table Maintenance Console Location 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table Feature Guide References 3.2.1.21 Holiday Service Interview Mailbox/Custom Service Menu If "Interview Mailbox" or "Custom Service Menu" was selected for Service, specify the Interview Mailbox or Custom Service here.
Page 879 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table Feature Guide References 3.2.1.21 Holiday Service PC Programming Manual...
Page 880 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table PC Programming Manual...
Page 881: Um Configuration-[5] System Parameters
Section 24 UM Configuration—[5] System Parameters This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System Parameters menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 882: Um Configuration-[5-1] System Parameters-Mailbox Group
24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group 24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group Also called System Group Distribution Lists. Mailbox Groups allow a caller or subscriber to record a message and have it sent to several mailboxes. Messages sent to a Mailbox Group are sent to all subscribers in the group.
Page 883 24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group Select the desired WAV file. Click Open to import the file. Click OK. Group List No. Specifies the Mailbox Group number. This number is similar to a mailbox number and is used to send a message to all subscribers of the group.
Page 884: Um Configuration-[5-2] System Parameters-Extension Group
24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group 24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group An Extension Group is a group of extensions that share a common mailbox. Each group has an Extension Group number. If the group number is assigned as the owner of a mailbox, then all members cannot be assigned their own personal mailboxes.
Page 885 24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group Feature Guide References 3.2.1.18 Extension Group Group Name Specifies the group name. Value Range Max. 32 characters Maintenance Console Location 24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group Feature Guide References 3.2.1.18 Extension Group PC Programming Manual...
Page 886: Um Configuration-[5-3] System Parameters-System Caller Name Announcement
24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement 24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement Allows the System Administrator to store a maximum of 200 telephone numbers and record a caller name for each telephone number. The caller name is announced when playing a message in their mailbox from one of the pre-programmed callers, when the system transfers a call to the subscriber from one of the pre-programmed callers (Caller ID Screening), and when the system pages the subscriber by intercom (Intercom Paging).
Page 887 24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement Click Open to import the file. Click OK. Caller-ID No. Assigns the telephone number for which the system announces the pre-recorded caller name to extension users. Value Range Max. 20 digits consisting of 0–9 Maintenance Console Location 24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement Feature Guide References...
Page 888: Um Configuration-[5-4] System Parameters-Parameters
24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Daily Hours Setting Clock Format Specifies the time format (12-hour or 24-hour). Note The selected time format (12-hour or 24-hour) affects the time format of reports as well as the time that appears in e-mail notifications for new messages.
Page 889 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Evening Hours Start Time (HH:MM) Specifies the starting time of the evening greeting. Value Range HH:MM (HH: Hour, MM: Minute) Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.12 Company Greeting Prompt Setting These settings are required when Multilingual Service is enabled.
Page 890 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters PC Programming Manual References 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Prompt for No DTMF Input Callers 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—External Message Delivery Feature Guide References 3.2.1.32 Multilingual Service 3.2.1.42 System Prompts Language 1–5—Language...
Page 891 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.42 System Prompts Selection Menu Repeat Cycle (1-3 times) Specifies the number of times the system will play the Multilingual Selection Menu. Value Range 1–3 Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters...
Page 892 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.42 System Prompts System Guidance—System Guidance Specifies the parameters which vary depending on the language assigned as the System Guidance language. For each selection of this setting, related items within "System Guidance 1–8" can be set. Value Range Guidance No.
Page 893 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters System Guidance—Select Language—# Announcement Mode Specifies the way of announcement for the "#" character when "US-English" or "English (UK)" is selected as System Guidance. Value Range POUND, HASH Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters PBX Parameters...
Page 894 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters , : Dial Pause (default 1 s) ; : Dial Pause (default 3 s) X: Extension Dialling 0–9, , #: Dial Code Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters PBX Environment—Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F T X , ;]) Specifies the sequence for transferring calls to extensions in the Alternate Extension Group.
Page 895 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Dialling Parameters/MSW Notification Dialling Parameters—Number of Digits to Access Outside Line (0-8 digits) This parameter should match the number of digits of the trunk access number required by the PBX when making outside calls. Example: If the PBX requires callers to dial "9"...
Page 896 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Dialling Parameters—Pause Time for "," (100-9900 ms, *100 ms) Specifies the pause time for "," used in call sequences. Value Range 100–9900 ms, in units of 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Dialling Parameters—Pause Time for ";"...
Page 897 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.31 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device External Message Delivery Determines how essential External Message Delivery features are carried out. Retry Times (times) Specifies the number of times the system will attempt to deliver an external message when the destination is busy or does not answer.
Page 898 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.2.13 External Message Delivery Service Outgoing Call UM Extensions Specifies the Unified Messaging extensions for the External Message Delivery feature. Value Range UM port extension number Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters PC Programming Manual References...
Page 899 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.2.13 External Message Delivery Service System External Message Delivery Duration Time (1-9 min) Specifies the maximum length of External Message Delivery calls. The timer begins counting when the called party answers the call, and if the called party has not pressed the appropriate dial key to initiate message playback, the system terminates the call when this timer expires.
Page 900 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.24 Intercom Paging Announcement Repeat Cycle (1-3 times) Specifies the number of times the system announces the page. Example: "I have a call for (name)". Value Range 1–3 times Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.24 Intercom Paging...
Page 901 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.24 Intercom Paging Fax Management You can programme the system to automatically detect incoming fax calls and forward those calls to a fax extension. You can specify a maximum of 2 fax extensions as the destination for faxes; if the main fax extension is not available to receive a fax, the system will forward the fax call to the alternate fax extension.
Page 902 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Value Range 1–8 digits Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.1.3 Fax Server Alternate Fax Extension No. (1-8 digits) Specifies the extension number of the alternate fax machine. When the main fax extension is busy or does not answer within the time specified under Fax No Answer Time (5-60s) , the system forwards the fax call to the alternate fax extension.
Page 903 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Value Range 2–[the value set in Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8)] digits Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.1.3 Fax Server Fax No Answer Coverage Mode Determines what action the system takes when an incoming fax call could not be answered by the main or alternate fax extension.
Page 904 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.1.3 Fax Server Mailbox for Fax Receiving If a DISA line detects a fax tone and forwards the call to the UM group’s floating extension number, the call is forwarded to the specified mailbox. Value Range Mailbox no.
Page 905 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Fax Properties—Number of Retries (0-99) Specifies the number of times a fax will be re-sent if initial sending fails. If the fax cannot be sent within the set number of retries, a non-delivery notification voice message will be sent to the target mailbox. Value Range 0–99 times Maintenance Console Location...
Page 906 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters From Error Page: The fax document is re-transmitted, starting from the page that was interrupted. Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.1.3 Fax Server Fax Properties—Delayed Answer Time (0-255 s) Specifies the amount of time the system waits before going off-hook when receiving a call.
Page 907 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.1.3 Fax Server Fax Properties—Printed Information Position Specifies where the printed information for the fax is positioned Value Range Inside: Printed information is positioned inside the print area of the fax document. Outside: Printed information is positioned outside of the margins of the print area of the fax document.
Page 908 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.1.3 Fax Server Fax Properties—Fax Busy Coverage Mode When the system is busy and cannot receive faxes, the system can transfer incoming faxes to a fax extension, or not answer the incoming call (the extension will be busy).
Page 909 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Value Range 0–60 s Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Maximum Call Duration (0-60 min) Specifies the maximum duration of calls. If the system detects no DTMF signals for the specified amount of time, it terminates the call.
Page 910 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Outside Transfer Sequence—EFA Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D F R T , ; N A]) Specifies the sequence the system uses to transfer calls to trunks using EFA (External Feature Access). This setting should match the settings of the PBX.
Page 911 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters F: Flash (Recall) R: Ringback Tone Detection T: Dial Tone Detection , : Dial Pause for 1 s (default) ; : Dial Pause for 3 s (default) N: Telephone Number Dialling A: Feature Access Code 0–9, , #: Dial Code Maintenance Console Location...
Page 912 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters to "EFA Transfer Sequence" specified in "Transfer to Outside". If set to "Disable", the system transfers incoming trunks calls to another trunk according to Outside Transfer Sequence—Call Transfer to Outside Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D F R T , ; N]) specified in Transfer to Outside. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 913 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Maintenance Console Location 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters E-mail Option E-mail Integration allows the system to send new message notification or to send recorded voice messages or fax message data as file attachments to subscribers via e-mail. The following settings must be made in order for the system to use E-mail Integration features.
Page 914 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device Maximum Message Length (Other) (1-30 min) Specifies the maximum length of voice messages sent as e-mail attachments. Note If you attach a voice message that is longer than this setting, surplus parts of the message may be discarded when sending the e-mail.
Page 915: Um Configuration-[6] H/W Settings
Section 25 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings This section serves as reference operating instructions for the H/W Settings menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 916: Um Configuration-[6] H/W Settings
25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings 25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings Global Parameters Global parameters define the settings that affect integration with other PBX operations. Maximum Time to Wait for Dial Tone (500-20000 ms, *100 ms) Specifies the length of time that the system waits for dial tone detection. Value Range 5–200 (´...
Page 917: Um Configuration-[7] System Security
Section 26 UM Configuration—[7] System Security This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System Security menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 918: Um Configuration-[7] System Security
26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security Manager Login Failures before Disconnection (1-99 times) Specifies the number of times an invalid password can be entered, when the System Manager or Message Manager tries to log in to the system using a telephone, before the call is disconnected. Value Range 1–99 times Maintenance Console Location...
Page 919 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security Value Range 4–16 characters (A–Z, a–z, 1–9) Maintenance Console Location 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security—Manager Feature Guide References 3.1.2.7 System Security Message Manager Access from Telephone Enables or disables access to the system from the Message Manager’s telephone. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 920 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security Value Range 4–16 characters (A–Z, a–z, 1–9) Maintenance Console Location 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security—Manager Feature Guide References 3.1.2.7 System Security Subscriber Minimum Password Length (0-16 digits) Specifies the minimum length (number of digits) of mailbox passwords. Value Range 0–16 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 921 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security—Subscriber Feature Guide References 3.1.2.7 System Security Default Password—Fix digit (which length is minimum password length) Select this option to specify a fixed password for all new mailboxes. The number of digits in the password must be equal or greater than the value specified in Minimum Password Length (0-16 digits).
Page 922 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security PC Programming Manual...
Page 923: Network Service
Section 27 Network Service This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Network Service menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 924: Network Service-[1] Ip Address/Ports
27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports Basic Settings LAN Setting—DHCP Port Number Specifies the port number of the DHCP client. This parameter is only available for entering values when Obtain an IP address automatically is selected. Value Range 68, 1024–65535 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 925 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports Maintenance Console Location 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings LAN Setting—Subnet Mask Specifies the network mask address of the mother board. This parameter is only available for entering values when Use the following IP address is selected. Value Range 0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255 (except 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255) Maintenance Console Location...
Page 926 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports Feature Guide References 5.6.6 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment DNS Setting—Preferred DNS IP Address Specifies the preferred IP address for the DNS server. This parameter is only available for entering values when Use the following DNS server address is selected. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 927: Advanced Settings
27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports Maintenance Console Location 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings DSP IP Setting—DSP Card #1 - 1/DSP Card #1 - 2/DSP Card #2 - 1/DSP Card #2 - 2—MAC Address Indicates the MAC address of the DSP card (reference only). Value Range 00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF Maintenance Console Location...
Page 928 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports Port Mirroring—Packet kind for mirroring Specifies the types of packets used for port mirroring. This setting is available at Installer level only. Value Range Disable LAN (All packets) LAN (Data packets PBX) LAN (Voice packets) Maintenance Console Location 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Advanced Settings Reference...
Page 929 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports Assigned DNS Server Address—Preferred DNS IP Address Indicates the assigned IP address for the preferred DNS server (reference only). Maintenance Console Location 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Reference Assigned DNS Server Address—Alternative DNS IP Address Indicates the assigned IP address for the alternative DNS server (reference only). Maintenance Console Location 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Reference DSP Card #1 - 1/DSP Card #1 - 2/DSP Card #2 - 1/DSP Card #2 - 2—IP Address...
Page 930: Network Service-[2] Server Feature
27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP 27.2 Network Service—[2] Server Feature 27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP Settings for the DHCP Server can be programmed. DHCP Server DHCP Server Specifies if the DHCP server functions of the PBX are enabled or not. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 931 27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP Maintenance Console Location 27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP Lease interval (h) Specifies the duration in hours of the DHCP allocation lease. Setting "0" specifies an unlimited lease duration. Value Range 1–168 (hours) Maintenance Console Location 27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP Auto assignment exclusions Up to 16 IP Addresses can be specified that will not be automatically assigned.
Page 932 27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP IP Address Assignment List MAC Address Specifies MAC addresses currently specified by the system. Value Range 00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF Maintenance Console Location 27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP IP Address Specifies IP addresses currently assigned by the system. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location...
Page 933: Network Service-[2-2] Server Feature-Ftp
27.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP 27.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP Settings for FTP server connections can be programmed. FTP Server Enables or disables the PBX’s FTP server function. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 27.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP Connection Control—Control Port number Specifies the port number for connecting to the PBX’s FTP server.
Page 934 27.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP Note Be sure to change the user name from its initial, default value. Also, for security reasons, change the user name regularly. Value Range Max. 24 characters (a–z, 0–9, [hyphen], [underscore]) Note The first character must be a letter (a–z). Maintenance Console Location 27.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP User Information—Password...
Page 935: Network Service-[2-4] Server Feature-Http
27.2.3 Network Service—[2-4] Server Feature—HTTP 27.2.3 Network Service—[2-4] Server Feature—HTTP HTTP server settings can be programmed. HTTP (LAN / MNT)—Port Number Specifies the port number for HTTP connections using the LAN or MNT ports. This port is used for accessing the PBX for Web Maintenance Console programming.
Page 936: Network Service-[2-5] Server Feature-Ntp
27.2.4 Network Service—[2-5] Server Feature—NTP 27.2.4 Network Service—[2-5] Server Feature—NTP NTP server settings for use with KX-UT series SIP phones can be programmed. NTP server Enables or disables NTP service with the PBX’s NTP server for connected KX-UT series SIP phones. When this feature is enabled, the PBX will report to connected KX-UT series SIP phones the information obtained from the SNTP server specified in 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date &...
Page 937: Network Service-[2-6] Server Feature-Smtp
27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP Settings for SMTP for sending e-mail for PBX functions can be programmed. Mail sending—Mail sender information name Specifies the name to be used as the sender of the e-mails from the PBX. Value Range Max.
Page 938 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP SMTP Authentication—SMTP Authentication Specifies whether authentication on the SMTP server is enabled. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP SMTP Authentication—User Name Specifies the user name required to access the SMTP server.
Page 939 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP POP Before SMTP—POP server address Specifies the IP address or host name of the POP server when POP before SMTP is enabled. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 (IP address), Max. 128 characters (host name) Maintenance Console Location 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP POP Before SMTP—POP server Port number Specifies the port number of the POP server when POP before SMTP is enabled.
Page 940 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP Maintenance Console Location 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP Mail Receiving—SMTP over TLS Specifies whether mail receiving uses Transport Layer Security for SMTP. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP Mail Receiving—Receive Port number (SMTPs) Specifies the receiving port number when using SMTPs.
Page 941: Network Service-[2-7] Server Feature-Imap4
27.2.6 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—IMAP4 27.2.6 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—IMAP4 Settings for IMAP4 server functions for the PBX can be programmed. IMAP4—IMAP4 server Specifies whether to enable the IMAP4 server functions of the PBX. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 27.2.6 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—IMAP4 IMAP4—Port number Specifies a port number for the IMAP server.
Page 942 27.2.6 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—IMAP4 Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 27.2.6 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—IMAP4 Authenticated Connection Timeout—Authenticated Connection Timeout (min) Specifies the amount of time of no activity that is required before an authenticated connection to the IMAP4 server will be disconnected.
Page 943: Network Service-[3] Client Feature
27.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP 27.3 Network Service—[3] Client Feature 27.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP FTP client connection settings can be programmed. Up to 5 FTP sites can be specified for connections. Connection 1—Connection 5 Connection Name Specifies the name of the connection to use for programming in other items. Value Range Max.
Page 944 27.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP User name Specifies the user name required to log in to the FTP site. Value Range Max. 24 characters (a–z, 0–9, $, [hyphen], [underscore]) Note • The first character must be a letter or number. •...
Page 945: Network Service-[3-2] Client Feature-Syslog
27.3.2 Network Service—[3-2] Client Feature—Syslog 27.3.2 Network Service—[3-2] Client Feature—Syslog Settings can be programmed for a Syslog client connection. Remote Syslog Specifies whether an external Syslog server will be used with the PBX. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 27.3.2 Network Service—[3-2] Client Feature—Syslog Remote Syslog server—IP address / Host name Specifies the IP address or host name of the external Syslog server.
Page 946: Network Service-[3-3] Client Feature-Snmp Agent
27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent 27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent Using SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol), it is possible for a PC assigned as an SNMP manager to manage and receive PBX system status information, such as alarm information and general system activity. The related PBX system settings can be programmed.
Page 947 27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent MIB info—SysContact Specifies the name and contact information of the system administrator. Value Range Max. 255 characters Maintenance Console Location 27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent Feature Guide References 2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor MIB info—SysName Specifies the administrative name for the system.
Page 948 27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent IP address Specifies the IP address of an SNMP manager. Click the button next to IP Address and enter the address. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent Feature Guide References 2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor Host name Specifies the host name of an SNMP manager.
Page 949 27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent Maintenance Console Location 27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent Feature Guide References 2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor TRAP filtering—Standard TRAP Selects whether the PBX sends standard trap messages to an SNMP manager or not. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
Page 950: Network Service-[4] Other
27.4.1 Network Service—[4-1] Other—Security 27.4 Network Service—[4] Other 27.4.1 Network Service—[4-1] Other—Security Network security settings can be programmed. ICMP ECHO Reply—LAN Port Specifies if the LAN port will send ICMP echo-replies to incoming ICMP echo-requests. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 27.4.1 Network Service—[4-1] Other—Security ICMP ECHO Reply—Log Output Specifies if the PBX logs ICMP echo-replies.
Page 951: Appendix
Section 28 Appendix PC Programming Manual...
Page 952: Revision History
28.1.1 KX-NS1000 PCMPR Software File Version 002.0xxxx 28.1 Revision History 28.1.1 KX-NS1000 PCMPR Software File Version 002.0xxxx New Contents • 1.2.3.1 One-look Networking Survivability • 6.12 Tool—DXDP All OUS • 6.15 Tool—URL Information • 7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis—Pair Port Test •...
Page 953 28.1.1 KX-NS1000 PCMPR Software File Version 002.0xxxx – SIP Extension— Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port – SIP Extension— Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - NTP Server IP Address – SIP Extension— Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - NTP Server Port No.
Page 954: Kx-Ns1000 Pcmpr Software File Version 002.1Xxxx
28.1.2 KX-NS1000 PCMPR Software File Version 002.1xxxx Changed Contents • 3.1 Home Screen • 5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File • 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File • 6.5 Tool—Extension List View • 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup • 6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore •...
Page 955: Feature Programming References
Feature Programming References PC Programming Manual...
Page 956 Feature Programming References Absent Message • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Absent Message Set / Cancel • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Absent Message • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Absent Message • 14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message Feature Guide References 2.20.2 Absent Message Account Code Entry...
Page 957 Feature Programming References Automatic Fax Delivery • 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Fax Options – Automatic Delivery Status – Automatic Delivery Status Default Fax Number [0-9 * # T , ; ] – Automatic Delivery Status Printed Fax Message Feature Guide References 3.2.2.2 Automatic Fax Delivery Automatic Fax Transfer •...
Page 958 Feature Programming References • 27.2.4 Network Service—[2-5] Server Feature—NTP— NTP server Feature Guide References 5.5.5 Automatic Setup Background Music (BGM) • 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features – External BGM On / Off – BGM Set / Cancel •...
Page 959 Feature Programming References Call Billing for Guest Room • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension • 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge— Checkout Billing—LCD for "Telephone" • 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Charge – Margin & Tax—Margin Rate for "Telephone" (%) –...
Page 960 Feature Programming References Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P) • 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY • 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—...
Page 961 Feature Programming References – Call Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Holding Extension Number – Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Held CO Line Number • 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options – Option 1— PT Operation—Automatic Hold by ICM / CO / ICD Group Key –...
Page 962 Feature Programming References – Group Call Pickup – Directed Call Pickup – Call Pickup Deny Set / Cancel • 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4 • 11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Call Pickup Deny •...
Page 963 Feature Programming References Call Waiting • 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type— Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features – Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call – Automatic Call Waiting • 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature –...
Page 964 Feature Programming References • 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8 – Extension Caller ID Sending – Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID • 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution...
Page 965 Feature Programming References – Main— Extension Number – CLIP— CLIP ID – CLIP— CLIP on Extension/CO – CLIP— CLIR – CLIP— COLR • 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings – CLIP— CLIP ID –...
Page 966 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail Class of Service (COS) • 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS) Common Extension Numbering for 2 PBXs •...
Page 967 Feature Programming References Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) • 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Dial Information (CTI) • 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 6 (CTI) Feature Guide References 2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Conference • 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers &...
Page 968 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone Data Line Security • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Data Line Security Set / Cancel • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2— Data Mode Feature Guide References 2.11.5 Data Line Security Dial Tone •...
Page 969 Feature Programming References Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) • 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—DDI / DID • 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DDI / DID / TIE / MSN –...
Page 970 Feature Programming References – Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking • 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Charge – Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point – Charge Options—Currency – Charge Options—Currency Display Position • 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings— CO Name Feature Guide References 2.21.4 Display Information...
Page 971 Feature Programming References • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— DOORPHONE Call • 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night • 10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE • 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 3— Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Called by Voice •...
Page 972 Feature Programming References • 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Executive Busy Override • 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive – Executive Busy Override – Executive Busy Override Deny • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny •...
Page 973 Feature Programming References • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— External Feature Access • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode during CO Conversation • 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode during CO Conversation •...
Page 974 Feature Programming References • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode during CO Conversation • 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type Feature Guide References 2.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate Flexible Buttons • 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode •...
Page 975 Feature Programming References – Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO – Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension • 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1 – PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED – PT Fwd / DND—DND LED –...
Page 976 Feature Programming References Hands-free Answerback • 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free • 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant— Automatic Answer (Caller) • 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options –...
Page 977 Feature Programming References 2.6.6 Hot Line Idle Extension Hunting • 11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group • 11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting Incoming Call Distribution Group Features • 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings –...
Page 978 Feature Programming References • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— ISDN Bearer Feature Guide References 4.1.2 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features Intercept Routing • 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night •...
Page 979 Feature Programming References • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— • 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone— • 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay— COS Number Feature Guide References 2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block Internal Call Features •...
Page 980 Feature Programming References – Added Number Feature Guide References 4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN) KX-UT Series SIP Phones • 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main— System Speed Dial Download For UT Extensions • 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—Main— IP Terminal Registration Mode •...
Page 981 Feature Programming References Line Preference—Incoming • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4— Incoming Preferred Line • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— Incoming Preferred Line Feature Guide References 2.4.2 Line Preference—Incoming Line Preference—Outgoing • 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block •...
Page 982 Feature Programming References – Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out) • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer • 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button – Type – Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out) – Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out) • 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—SMDR— Print Information—Log-in / Log-out Feature Guide References 2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out...
Page 983 Feature Programming References – DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Remove Digit – DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Additional Dial • 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table Feature Guide References 2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service Music on Hold • 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM • 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH –...
Page 984 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 2.10.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) Off-hook Monitor • 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1— PT Operation—Off Hook Monitor Feature Guide References 2.11.2 Off-hook Monitor One-look Networking • 1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types • 3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard •...
Page 985 Feature Programming References • 11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table— Queuing Sequence—Sequence 01–16 • 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message— Floating Extension Number Feature Guide References 2.28.2 Outgoing Message (OGM) Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group •...
Page 986 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension • 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—PDN/SDN • 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options – Option 4— System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD –...
Page 987 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 5.6.2 Power Failure Transfer Printing Message • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Printing Message • 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Main— SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8 Feature Guide References 2.22.2 Printing Message Privacy Release •...
Page 988 Feature Programming References PT Programming • 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Programming Mode • 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—Password – Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1 Feature Guide References 5.5.3 PT Programming QSIG Enhanced Features • 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2— CO - CO Call Limitation—After Conference •...
Page 989 Feature Programming References Ring Tone Pattern Selection • 10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO— Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8 • 10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE— Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8 • 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others— Extension—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8 •...
Page 990 Feature Programming References – Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Proxy Server IP Address – Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port No. – Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - NTP Server IP Address –...
Page 991 Feature Programming References 5.5.9 Software Upgrading Special Carrier Access Code • 15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier Feature Guide References 2.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code Speed Dialling—Personal/System • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features – System Speed Dialling / Personal Speed Dialling –...
Page 992 Feature Programming References 2.22.1.2 Syslog Record Management Tenant Service • 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM – PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night – BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold • 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table • 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table •...
Page 993 Feature Programming References • 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night • 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4— Private Network—TIE Call by Extension Numbering • 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— • 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table •...
Page 994 Feature Programming References • 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Main— SMDR for External Hotel Application 1—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call) • 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—SMDR— Print Information—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call) Feature Guide References 2.24.4 Timed Reminder Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) •...
Page 995 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access Trunk Adaptor Connection • 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property – Trunk Adaptor – Connection Attribute – Channel Attribute • 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property – Trunk Adaptor – Connection Attribute Feature Guide References 5.3.2 Trunk Adaptor Connection Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) •...
Page 996 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 4.2.3.3 UM Group Failover Unified Messaging—Alternate Extension Group • 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters— Alternate Extension Feature Guide References 3.2.1.1 Alternate Extension Group Unified Messaging—Auto Forwarding • 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/ Personal Custom Serv –...
Page 997 Feature Programming References 3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA) Unified Messaging—Automatic Login • 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service – Auto Login Extension – Auto Login Extension Password Entry Requirement – Auto Login Caller ID 1, 2 – Auto Login Caller ID Password Entry Requirement –...
Page 998 Feature Programming References 3.2.2.8 Call Transfer Status Unified Messaging—Call Transfer to Outside • 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Call Transfer— Call Transfer to Outside • 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Transfer to Outside Feature Guide References 3.2.1.7 Call Transfer to Outside Unified Messaging—Callback Number Entry •...
Page 999 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 3.2.2.6 Call-through Service Unified Messaging—Company Greeting • 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group – Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Company Greeting No. (Selection) – Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Company Greeting No. (Other) •...
Page 1000 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 3.2.2.12 Direct Service Access Unified Messaging—Extension Group • 24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group Feature Guide References 3.2.1.18 Extension Group Unified Messaging—External Message Delivery Service • 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/ Personal Custom Serv –...

Panasonic KX-NS1000 Pc Programming Manual

1 Overview

2 Introduction of Web Maintenance Console

3 Web Maintenance Console Home Screen

4 Status

5 System Control

6 Tool

7 Utility

8 Users

9 PBX Configuration-[1] Configuration

10 PBX Configuration-[2] System

11 PBX Configuration-[3] Group

12 PBX Configuration-[4] Extension

13 PBX Configuration-[5] Optional Device

14 PBX Configuration-[6] Feature

Quick Links

Related Manuals for Panasonic KX-NS1000

Summary of Contents for Panasonic KX-NS1000